Home | History | Annotate | Line # | Download | only in bfd
elf64-s390.c revision 1.1.1.5
      1      1.1     skrll /* IBM S/390-specific support for 64-bit ELF
      2  1.1.1.5  christos    Copyright (C) 2000-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
      3      1.1     skrll    Contributed Martin Schwidefsky (schwidefsky (at) de.ibm.com).
      4      1.1     skrll 
      5      1.1     skrll    This file is part of BFD, the Binary File Descriptor library.
      6      1.1     skrll 
      7      1.1     skrll    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
      8      1.1     skrll    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
      9      1.1     skrll    the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
     10      1.1     skrll    (at your option) any later version.
     11      1.1     skrll 
     12      1.1     skrll    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
     13      1.1     skrll    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
     14      1.1     skrll    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
     15      1.1     skrll    GNU General Public License for more details.
     16      1.1     skrll 
     17      1.1     skrll    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     18      1.1     skrll    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
     19      1.1     skrll    Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
     20      1.1     skrll    02110-1301, USA.  */
     21      1.1     skrll 
     22      1.1     skrll #include "sysdep.h"
     23      1.1     skrll #include "bfd.h"
     24      1.1     skrll #include "bfdlink.h"
     25      1.1     skrll #include "libbfd.h"
     26      1.1     skrll #include "elf-bfd.h"
     27      1.1     skrll #include "elf/s390.h"
     28      1.1     skrll 
     29      1.1     skrll /* In case we're on a 32-bit machine, construct a 64-bit "-1" value
     30      1.1     skrll    from smaller values.  Start with zero, widen, *then* decrement.  */
     31      1.1     skrll #define MINUS_ONE      (((bfd_vma)0) - 1)
     32      1.1     skrll 
     33  1.1.1.3  christos static bfd_reloc_status_type
     34  1.1.1.3  christos s390_tls_reloc (bfd *, arelent *, asymbol *, void *,
     35  1.1.1.3  christos 		asection *, bfd *, char **);
     36  1.1.1.3  christos static bfd_reloc_status_type
     37  1.1.1.3  christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc (bfd *, arelent *, asymbol *, void *,
     38  1.1.1.3  christos 		      asection *, bfd *, char **);
     39  1.1.1.3  christos 
     40      1.1     skrll /* The relocation "howto" table.  */
     41      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type elf_howto_table[] =
     42      1.1     skrll {
     43      1.1     skrll   HOWTO (R_390_NONE,		/* type */
     44      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* rightshift */
     45  1.1.1.4  christos 	 3,			/* size (0 = byte, 1 = 2 byte, 2 = 4 byte) */
     46      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* bitsize */
     47      1.1     skrll 	 FALSE,			/* pc_relative */
     48      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* bitpos */
     49      1.1     skrll 	 complain_overflow_dont, /* complain_on_overflow */
     50      1.1     skrll 	 bfd_elf_generic_reloc, /* special_function */
     51      1.1     skrll 	 "R_390_NONE",		/* name */
     52      1.1     skrll 	 FALSE,			/* partial_inplace */
     53      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* src_mask */
     54      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* dst_mask */
     55      1.1     skrll 	 FALSE),		/* pcrel_offset */
     56      1.1     skrll 
     57      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_8,         0, 0,  8, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     58      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_8",        FALSE, 0,0x000000ff, FALSE),
     59      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_12,        0, 1, 12, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
     60      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_12",       FALSE, 0,0x00000fff, FALSE),
     61      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_16,        0, 1, 16, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     62      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_16",       FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, FALSE),
     63      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_32,        0, 2, 32, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     64      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_32",       FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, FALSE),
     65      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PC32,	 0, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     66      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC32",     FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, TRUE),
     67      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOT12,	 0, 1, 12, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     68      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT12",    FALSE, 0,0x00000fff, FALSE),
     69      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOT32,	 0, 2, 32, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     70      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT32",    FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, FALSE),
     71      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PLT32,	 0, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     72      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT32",    FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, TRUE),
     73      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_COPY,      0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     74      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_COPY",     FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
     75      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GLOB_DAT,  0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     76      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GLOB_DAT", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
     77      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_JMP_SLOT,  0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     78      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_JMP_SLOT", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
     79      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_RELATIVE,  0, 4, 64,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     80      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_RELATIVE", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
     81      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF32,  0, 2, 32, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     82      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF32", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
     83      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPC,     0, 4, 64,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     84      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPC",    FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  TRUE),
     85      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOT16,     0, 1, 16, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     86      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT16",    FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, FALSE),
     87      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PC16,      0, 1, 16,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     88      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC16",     FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, TRUE),
     89      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PC16DBL,   1, 1, 16,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     90      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC16DBL",  FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, TRUE),
     91      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PLT16DBL,  1, 1, 16,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     92      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT16DBL", FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, TRUE),
     93      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PC32DBL,	 1, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     94      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC32DBL",  FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, TRUE),
     95      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PLT32DBL,	 1, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     96      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT32DBL", FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, TRUE),
     97      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPCDBL,  1, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     98      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPCDBL", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  TRUE),
     99      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_64,        0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    100      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_64",       FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
    101      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PC64,	 0, 4, 64,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    102      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC64",     FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  TRUE),
    103      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOT64,	 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    104      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT64",    FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
    105      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PLT64,	 0, 4, 64,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    106      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT64",    FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  TRUE),
    107      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTENT,	 1, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    108      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTENT",   FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  TRUE),
    109      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF16,  0, 1, 16, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    110      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF16", FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, FALSE),
    111      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF64,  0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    112      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF64", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
    113      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT12,	 0, 1, 12, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    114      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT12", FALSE, 0,0x00000fff, FALSE),
    115      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT16,  0, 1, 16, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    116      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT16", FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, FALSE),
    117      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT32,	 0, 2, 32, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    118      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT32", FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, FALSE),
    119      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT64,	 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    120      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT64", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
    121      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLTENT, 1, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    122      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLTENT",FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  TRUE),
    123      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF16,  0, 1, 16, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    124      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF16", FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, FALSE),
    125      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF32,  0, 2, 32, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    126      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF32", FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, FALSE),
    127      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF64,  0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    128      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF64", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
    129      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LOAD, 0, 0, 0, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    130      1.1     skrll 	s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LOAD", FALSE, 0, 0, FALSE),
    131      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GDCALL, 0, 0, 0, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    132      1.1     skrll 	s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GDCALL", FALSE, 0, 0, FALSE),
    133      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDCALL, 0, 0, 0, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    134      1.1     skrll 	s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDCALL", FALSE, 0, 0, FALSE),
    135      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_GD32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_GD32.  */
    136      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GD64,  0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    137      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GD64", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    138      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE12, 0, 1, 12, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    139      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE12", FALSE, 0, 0x00000fff, FALSE),
    140      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_GOTIE32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_GOTIE32.  */
    141      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE64, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    142      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE64", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    143      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LDM32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LDM32.  */
    144      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDM64, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    145      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDM64", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    146      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_IE32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_IE32.  */
    147      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_IE64,  0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    148      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_IE64", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    149      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_IEENT, 1, 2, 32, TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    150      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_IEENT", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, TRUE),
    151      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LE32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LE32.  */
    152      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LE64,  0, 2, 32, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    153      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LE64", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    154      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LDO32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LDO32.  */
    155      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDO64, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    156      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDO64", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    157      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_DTPMOD, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    158      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_DTPMOD", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    159      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_DTPOFF, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    160      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_DTPOFF", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    161      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_TPOFF, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    162      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_TPOFF", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    163      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_20,        0, 2, 20, FALSE, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
    164      1.1     skrll 	s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_20",      FALSE, 0,0x0fffff00, FALSE),
    165      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOT20,	 0, 2, 20, FALSE, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
    166      1.1     skrll 	s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_GOT20",   FALSE, 0,0x0fffff00, FALSE),
    167      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT20,  0, 2, 20, FALSE, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
    168      1.1     skrll 	s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT20", FALSE, 0,0x0fffff00, FALSE),
    169      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE20, 0, 2, 20, FALSE, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
    170      1.1     skrll 	s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE20", FALSE, 0,0x0fffff00, FALSE),
    171  1.1.1.3  christos   HOWTO(R_390_IRELATIVE, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    172  1.1.1.3  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_IRELATIVE", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    173  1.1.1.4  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC12DBL,   1, 1, 12,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    174  1.1.1.4  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC12DBL",  FALSE, 0,0x00000fff, TRUE),
    175  1.1.1.4  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLT12DBL,  1, 1, 12,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    176  1.1.1.4  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT12DBL", FALSE, 0,0x00000fff, TRUE),
    177  1.1.1.4  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC24DBL,   1, 2, 24,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    178  1.1.1.4  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC24DBL",  FALSE, 0,0x00ffffff, TRUE),
    179  1.1.1.4  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLT24DBL,  1, 2, 24,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    180  1.1.1.4  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT24DBL", FALSE, 0,0x00ffffff, TRUE),
    181      1.1     skrll };
    182      1.1     skrll 
    183      1.1     skrll /* GNU extension to record C++ vtable hierarchy.  */
    184      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto =
    185      1.1     skrll   HOWTO (R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT, 0,4,0,FALSE,0,complain_overflow_dont, NULL, "R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT", FALSE,0, 0, FALSE);
    186      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type elf64_s390_vtentry_howto =
    187      1.1     skrll   HOWTO (R_390_GNU_VTENTRY, 0,4,0,FALSE,0,complain_overflow_dont, _bfd_elf_rel_vtable_reloc_fn,"R_390_GNU_VTENTRY", FALSE,0,0, FALSE);
    188      1.1     skrll 
    189      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type *
    190  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_reloc_type_lookup (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    191  1.1.1.3  christos 			    bfd_reloc_code_real_type code)
    192      1.1     skrll {
    193      1.1     skrll   switch (code)
    194      1.1     skrll     {
    195      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_NONE:
    196      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_NONE];
    197      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_8:
    198      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_8];
    199      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_12:
    200      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_12];
    201      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_16:
    202      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_16];
    203      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_32:
    204      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_32];
    205      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_CTOR:
    206      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_32];
    207      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_32_PCREL:
    208      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC32];
    209      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT12:
    210      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT12];
    211      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_32_GOT_PCREL:
    212      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT32];
    213      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT32:
    214      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT32];
    215      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_COPY:
    216      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_COPY];
    217      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GLOB_DAT:
    218      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GLOB_DAT];
    219      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_JMP_SLOT:
    220      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_JMP_SLOT];
    221      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_RELATIVE:
    222      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_RELATIVE];
    223      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_32_GOTOFF:
    224      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF32];
    225      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPC:
    226      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPC];
    227      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT16:
    228      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT16];
    229      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_16_PCREL:
    230      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC16];
    231  1.1.1.4  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_PC12DBL:
    232  1.1.1.4  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC12DBL];
    233  1.1.1.4  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT12DBL:
    234  1.1.1.4  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT12DBL];
    235      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PC16DBL:
    236      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC16DBL];
    237      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT16DBL:
    238      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT16DBL];
    239  1.1.1.4  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_PC24DBL:
    240  1.1.1.4  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC24DBL];
    241  1.1.1.4  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT24DBL:
    242  1.1.1.4  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT24DBL];
    243      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PC32DBL:
    244      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC32DBL];
    245      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT32DBL:
    246      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT32DBL];
    247      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPCDBL:
    248      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPCDBL];
    249      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_64:
    250      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_64];
    251      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_64_PCREL:
    252      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC64];
    253      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT64:
    254      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT64];
    255      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT64:
    256      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT64];
    257      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTENT:
    258      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTENT];
    259      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_16_GOTOFF:
    260      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF16];
    261      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTOFF64:
    262      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF64];
    263      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT12:
    264      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT12];
    265      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT16:
    266      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT16];
    267      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT32:
    268      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT32];
    269      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT64:
    270      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT64];
    271      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLTENT:
    272      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLTENT];
    273      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF16:
    274      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF16];
    275      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF32:
    276      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF32];
    277      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF64:
    278      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF64];
    279      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LOAD:
    280      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LOAD];
    281      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GDCALL:
    282      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GDCALL];
    283      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDCALL:
    284      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDCALL];
    285      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GD64:
    286      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GD64];
    287      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
    288      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE12];
    289      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
    290      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE64];
    291      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDM64:
    292      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDM64];
    293      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_IE64:
    294      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_IE64];
    295      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_IEENT:
    296      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_IEENT];
    297      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LE64:
    298      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LE64];
    299      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDO64:
    300      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDO64];
    301      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_DTPMOD:
    302      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_DTPMOD];
    303      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_DTPOFF:
    304      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_DTPOFF];
    305      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_TPOFF:
    306      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_TPOFF];
    307      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_20:
    308      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_20];
    309      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT20:
    310      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT20];
    311      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT20:
    312      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT20];
    313      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
    314      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE20];
    315  1.1.1.3  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_IRELATIVE:
    316  1.1.1.3  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_IRELATIVE];
    317      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_VTABLE_INHERIT:
    318      1.1     skrll       return &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto;
    319      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_VTABLE_ENTRY:
    320      1.1     skrll       return &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto;
    321      1.1     skrll     default:
    322      1.1     skrll       break;
    323      1.1     skrll     }
    324      1.1     skrll   return 0;
    325      1.1     skrll }
    326      1.1     skrll 
    327      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type *
    328      1.1     skrll elf_s390_reloc_name_lookup (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    329      1.1     skrll 			    const char *r_name)
    330      1.1     skrll {
    331      1.1     skrll   unsigned int i;
    332      1.1     skrll 
    333      1.1     skrll   for (i = 0;
    334      1.1     skrll        i < sizeof (elf_howto_table) / sizeof (elf_howto_table[0]);
    335      1.1     skrll        i++)
    336      1.1     skrll     if (elf_howto_table[i].name != NULL
    337      1.1     skrll 	&& strcasecmp (elf_howto_table[i].name, r_name) == 0)
    338      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[i];
    339      1.1     skrll 
    340  1.1.1.5  christos   if (strcasecmp (elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto.name, r_name) == 0)
    341  1.1.1.5  christos     return &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto;
    342  1.1.1.5  christos   if (strcasecmp (elf64_s390_vtentry_howto.name, r_name) == 0)
    343  1.1.1.5  christos     return &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto;
    344      1.1     skrll 
    345      1.1     skrll   return NULL;
    346      1.1     skrll }
    347      1.1     skrll 
    348      1.1     skrll /* We need to use ELF64_R_TYPE so we have our own copy of this function,
    349      1.1     skrll    and elf64-s390.c has its own copy.  */
    350      1.1     skrll 
    351      1.1     skrll static void
    352  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_info_to_howto (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    353  1.1.1.3  christos 			arelent *cache_ptr,
    354  1.1.1.3  christos 			Elf_Internal_Rela *dst)
    355      1.1     skrll {
    356      1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type = ELF64_R_TYPE(dst->r_info);
    357      1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
    358      1.1     skrll     {
    359      1.1     skrll     case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT:
    360      1.1     skrll       cache_ptr->howto = &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto;
    361      1.1     skrll       break;
    362      1.1     skrll 
    363      1.1     skrll     case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY:
    364      1.1     skrll       cache_ptr->howto = &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto;
    365      1.1     skrll       break;
    366      1.1     skrll 
    367      1.1     skrll     default:
    368      1.1     skrll       if (r_type >= sizeof (elf_howto_table) / sizeof (elf_howto_table[0]))
    369      1.1     skrll 	{
    370      1.1     skrll 	  (*_bfd_error_handler) (_("%B: invalid relocation type %d"),
    371      1.1     skrll 				 abfd, (int) r_type);
    372      1.1     skrll 	  r_type = R_390_NONE;
    373      1.1     skrll 	}
    374      1.1     skrll       cache_ptr->howto = &elf_howto_table[r_type];
    375      1.1     skrll     }
    376      1.1     skrll }
    377      1.1     skrll 
    378      1.1     skrll /* A relocation function which doesn't do anything.  */
    379      1.1     skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
    380  1.1.1.3  christos s390_tls_reloc (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    381  1.1.1.3  christos 		arelent *reloc_entry,
    382  1.1.1.3  christos 		asymbol *symbol ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    383  1.1.1.3  christos 		void * data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    384  1.1.1.3  christos 		asection *input_section,
    385  1.1.1.3  christos 		bfd *output_bfd,
    386  1.1.1.3  christos 		char **error_message ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
    387      1.1     skrll {
    388      1.1     skrll   if (output_bfd)
    389      1.1     skrll     reloc_entry->address += input_section->output_offset;
    390      1.1     skrll   return bfd_reloc_ok;
    391      1.1     skrll }
    392      1.1     skrll 
    393      1.1     skrll /* Handle the large displacement relocs.  */
    394      1.1     skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
    395  1.1.1.3  christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc (bfd *abfd,
    396  1.1.1.3  christos 		      arelent *reloc_entry,
    397  1.1.1.3  christos 		      asymbol *symbol,
    398  1.1.1.3  christos 		      void * data,
    399  1.1.1.3  christos 		      asection *input_section,
    400  1.1.1.3  christos 		      bfd *output_bfd,
    401  1.1.1.3  christos 		      char **error_message ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
    402      1.1     skrll {
    403      1.1     skrll   reloc_howto_type *howto = reloc_entry->howto;
    404      1.1     skrll   bfd_vma relocation;
    405      1.1     skrll   bfd_vma insn;
    406      1.1     skrll 
    407      1.1     skrll   if (output_bfd != (bfd *) NULL
    408      1.1     skrll       && (symbol->flags & BSF_SECTION_SYM) == 0
    409      1.1     skrll       && (! howto->partial_inplace
    410      1.1     skrll 	  || reloc_entry->addend == 0))
    411      1.1     skrll     {
    412      1.1     skrll       reloc_entry->address += input_section->output_offset;
    413      1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_ok;
    414      1.1     skrll     }
    415      1.1     skrll   if (output_bfd != NULL)
    416      1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_continue;
    417      1.1     skrll 
    418      1.1     skrll   if (reloc_entry->address > bfd_get_section_limit (abfd, input_section))
    419      1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_outofrange;
    420      1.1     skrll 
    421      1.1     skrll   relocation = (symbol->value
    422      1.1     skrll 		+ symbol->section->output_section->vma
    423      1.1     skrll 		+ symbol->section->output_offset);
    424      1.1     skrll   relocation += reloc_entry->addend;
    425      1.1     skrll   if (howto->pc_relative)
    426      1.1     skrll     {
    427      1.1     skrll       relocation -= (input_section->output_section->vma
    428      1.1     skrll 		     + input_section->output_offset);
    429      1.1     skrll       relocation -= reloc_entry->address;
    430      1.1     skrll     }
    431      1.1     skrll 
    432  1.1.1.4  christos   insn = bfd_get_32 (abfd, (bfd_byte *) data + reloc_entry->address);
    433      1.1     skrll   insn |= (relocation & 0xfff) << 16 | (relocation & 0xff000) >> 4;
    434      1.1     skrll   bfd_put_32 (abfd, insn, (bfd_byte *) data + reloc_entry->address);
    435      1.1     skrll 
    436      1.1     skrll   if ((bfd_signed_vma) relocation < - 0x80000
    437      1.1     skrll       || (bfd_signed_vma) relocation > 0x7ffff)
    438      1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_overflow;
    439      1.1     skrll   else
    440      1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_ok;
    441      1.1     skrll }
    442      1.1     skrll 
    443      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    444  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_is_local_label_name (bfd *abfd, const char *name)
    445      1.1     skrll {
    446      1.1     skrll   if (name[0] == '.' && (name[1] == 'X' || name[1] == 'L'))
    447      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
    448      1.1     skrll 
    449      1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elf_is_local_label_name (abfd, name);
    450      1.1     skrll }
    451      1.1     skrll 
    452      1.1     skrll /* Functions for the 390 ELF linker.  */
    453      1.1     skrll 
    454      1.1     skrll /* The name of the dynamic interpreter.  This is put in the .interp
    455      1.1     skrll    section.  */
    456      1.1     skrll 
    457  1.1.1.3  christos #define ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER "/lib/ld64.so.1"
    458      1.1     skrll 
    459      1.1     skrll /* If ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS is non-zero, the linker will try to avoid
    460      1.1     skrll    copying dynamic variables from a shared lib into an app's dynbss
    461      1.1     skrll    section, and instead use a dynamic relocation to point into the
    462      1.1     skrll    shared lib.  */
    463      1.1     skrll #define ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 1
    464      1.1     skrll 
    465      1.1     skrll /* The size in bytes of the first entry in the procedure linkage table.  */
    466      1.1     skrll #define PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE 32
    467      1.1     skrll /* The size in bytes of an entry in the procedure linkage table.  */
    468      1.1     skrll #define PLT_ENTRY_SIZE 32
    469      1.1     skrll 
    470      1.1     skrll #define GOT_ENTRY_SIZE 8
    471      1.1     skrll 
    472  1.1.1.3  christos #define RELA_ENTRY_SIZE sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela)
    473  1.1.1.3  christos 
    474      1.1     skrll /* The first three entries in a procedure linkage table are reserved,
    475      1.1     skrll    and the initial contents are unimportant (we zero them out).
    476      1.1     skrll    Subsequent entries look like this.  See the SVR4 ABI 386
    477      1.1     skrll    supplement to see how this works.  */
    478      1.1     skrll 
    479      1.1     skrll /* For the s390, simple addr offset can only be 0 - 4096.
    480      1.1     skrll    To use the full 16777216 TB address space, several instructions
    481      1.1     skrll    are needed to load an address in a register and execute
    482      1.1     skrll    a branch( or just saving the address)
    483      1.1     skrll 
    484      1.1     skrll    Furthermore, only r 0 and 1 are free to use!!!  */
    485      1.1     skrll 
    486      1.1     skrll /* The first 3 words in the GOT are then reserved.
    487      1.1     skrll    Word 0 is the address of the dynamic table.
    488      1.1     skrll    Word 1 is a pointer to a structure describing the object
    489      1.1     skrll    Word 2 is used to point to the loader entry address.
    490      1.1     skrll 
    491      1.1     skrll    The code for PLT entries looks like this:
    492      1.1     skrll 
    493      1.1     skrll    The GOT holds the address in the PLT to be executed.
    494      1.1     skrll    The loader then gets:
    495  1.1.1.5  christos    48(15) =  Pointer to the structure describing the object.
    496  1.1.1.5  christos    56(15) =  Offset in symbol table
    497      1.1     skrll    The loader  must  then find the module where the function is
    498      1.1     skrll    and insert the address in the GOT.
    499      1.1     skrll 
    500      1.1     skrll    PLT1: LARL 1,<fn>@GOTENT # 6 bytes  Load address of GOT entry in r1
    501      1.1     skrll          LG   1,0(1)      # 6 bytes  Load address from GOT in r1
    502      1.1     skrll          BCR  15,1        # 2 bytes  Jump to address
    503      1.1     skrll    RET1: BASR 1,0         # 2 bytes  Return from GOT 1st time
    504      1.1     skrll          LGF  1,12(1)     # 6 bytes  Load offset in symbl table in r1
    505      1.1     skrll          BRCL 15,-x       # 6 bytes  Jump to start of PLT
    506  1.1.1.3  christos          .long ?          # 4 bytes  offset into .rela.plt
    507      1.1     skrll 
    508      1.1     skrll    Total = 32 bytes per PLT entry
    509      1.1     skrll    Fixup at offset 2: relative address to GOT entry
    510      1.1     skrll    Fixup at offset 22: relative branch to PLT0
    511  1.1.1.3  christos    Fixup at offset 28: 32 bit offset into .rela.plt
    512      1.1     skrll 
    513  1.1.1.3  christos    A 32 bit offset into the symbol table is enough. It allows for
    514  1.1.1.3  christos    .rela.plt sections up to a size of 2 gigabyte.  A single dynamic
    515  1.1.1.3  christos    object (the main program, any shared library) is limited to 4GB in
    516  1.1.1.3  christos    size.  Having a .rela.plt of 2GB would already make the .plt
    517  1.1.1.3  christos    section bigger than 8GB.  */
    518  1.1.1.3  christos 
    519  1.1.1.3  christos static const bfd_byte elf_s390x_plt_entry[PLT_ENTRY_SIZE] =
    520  1.1.1.3  christos   {
    521  1.1.1.3  christos     0xc0, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,     /* larl    %r1,.       */
    522  1.1.1.3  christos     0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x04,     /* lg      %r1,0(%r1)  */
    523  1.1.1.3  christos     0x07, 0xf1,                             /* br      %r1         */
    524  1.1.1.3  christos     0x0d, 0x10,                             /* basr    %r1,%r0     */
    525  1.1.1.3  christos     0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x0c, 0x00, 0x14,     /* lgf     %r1,12(%r1) */
    526  1.1.1.3  christos     0xc0, 0xf4, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,     /* jg      first plt   */
    527  1.1.1.3  christos     0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00                  /* .long   0x00000000  */
    528  1.1.1.3  christos   };
    529      1.1     skrll 
    530      1.1     skrll /* The first PLT entry pushes the offset into the symbol table
    531  1.1.1.3  christos    from R1 onto the stack at 56(15) and the loader object info
    532  1.1.1.3  christos    at 48(15), loads the loader address in R1 and jumps to it.  */
    533      1.1     skrll 
    534      1.1     skrll /* The first entry in the PLT:
    535      1.1     skrll 
    536      1.1     skrll   PLT0:
    537      1.1     skrll      STG  1,56(15)  # r1 contains the offset into the symbol table
    538      1.1     skrll      LARL 1,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE # load address of global offset table
    539      1.1     skrll      MVC  48(8,15),8(1) # move loader ino (object struct address) to stack
    540      1.1     skrll      LG   1,16(1)   # get entry address of loader
    541      1.1     skrll      BCR  15,1      # jump to loader
    542      1.1     skrll 
    543      1.1     skrll      Fixup at offset 8: relative address to start of GOT.  */
    544      1.1     skrll 
    545  1.1.1.3  christos static const bfd_byte elf_s390x_first_plt_entry[PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE] =
    546  1.1.1.3  christos   {
    547  1.1.1.3  christos     0xe3, 0x10, 0xf0, 0x38, 0x00, 0x24,     /* stg     %r1,56(%r15)      */
    548  1.1.1.3  christos     0xc0, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,     /* larl    %r1,.             */
    549  1.1.1.3  christos     0xd2, 0x07, 0xf0, 0x30, 0x10, 0x08,     /* mvc     48(8,%r15),8(%r1) */
    550  1.1.1.3  christos     0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x10, 0x00, 0x04,     /* lg      %r1,16(%r1)       */
    551  1.1.1.3  christos     0x07, 0xf1,                             /* br      %r1               */
    552  1.1.1.3  christos     0x07, 0x00,                             /* nopr    %r0               */
    553  1.1.1.3  christos     0x07, 0x00,                             /* nopr    %r0               */
    554  1.1.1.3  christos     0x07, 0x00                              /* nopr    %r0               */
    555  1.1.1.3  christos   };
    556      1.1     skrll 
    557      1.1     skrll 
    558      1.1     skrll /* s390 ELF linker hash entry.  */
    559      1.1     skrll 
    560      1.1     skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry
    561      1.1     skrll {
    562      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry elf;
    563      1.1     skrll 
    564      1.1     skrll   /* Track dynamic relocs copied for this symbol.  */
    565  1.1.1.3  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *dyn_relocs;
    566      1.1     skrll 
    567      1.1     skrll   /* Number of GOTPLT references for a function.  */
    568      1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma gotplt_refcount;
    569      1.1     skrll 
    570      1.1     skrll #define GOT_UNKNOWN	0
    571      1.1     skrll #define GOT_NORMAL	1
    572      1.1     skrll #define GOT_TLS_GD	2
    573      1.1     skrll #define GOT_TLS_IE	3
    574      1.1     skrll #define GOT_TLS_IE_NLT	3
    575      1.1     skrll   unsigned char tls_type;
    576  1.1.1.3  christos 
    577  1.1.1.3  christos   /* For pointer equality reasons we might need to change the symbol
    578  1.1.1.3  christos      type from STT_GNU_IFUNC to STT_FUNC together with its value and
    579  1.1.1.3  christos      section entry.  So after alloc_dynrelocs only these values should
    580  1.1.1.3  christos      be used.  In order to check whether a symbol is IFUNC use
    581  1.1.1.3  christos      s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p.  */
    582  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_vma ifunc_resolver_address;
    583  1.1.1.3  christos   asection *ifunc_resolver_section;
    584      1.1     skrll };
    585      1.1     skrll 
    586      1.1     skrll #define elf_s390_hash_entry(ent) \
    587      1.1     skrll   ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *)(ent))
    588      1.1     skrll 
    589  1.1.1.3  christos /* This structure represents an entry in the local PLT list needed for
    590  1.1.1.3  christos    local IFUNC symbols.  */
    591  1.1.1.3  christos struct plt_entry
    592  1.1.1.3  christos {
    593  1.1.1.3  christos   /* The section of the local symbol.
    594  1.1.1.3  christos      Set in relocate_section and used in finish_dynamic_sections.  */
    595  1.1.1.3  christos   asection *sec;
    596  1.1.1.3  christos 
    597  1.1.1.3  christos   union
    598  1.1.1.3  christos     {
    599  1.1.1.3  christos       bfd_signed_vma refcount;
    600  1.1.1.3  christos       bfd_vma offset;
    601  1.1.1.3  christos     } plt;
    602  1.1.1.3  christos };
    603  1.1.1.3  christos 
    604      1.1     skrll /* NOTE: Keep this structure in sync with
    605      1.1     skrll    the one declared in elf32-s390.c.  */
    606      1.1     skrll struct elf_s390_obj_tdata
    607      1.1     skrll {
    608      1.1     skrll   struct elf_obj_tdata root;
    609      1.1     skrll 
    610  1.1.1.3  christos   /* A local PLT is needed for ifunc symbols.  */
    611  1.1.1.3  christos   struct plt_entry *local_plt;
    612  1.1.1.3  christos 
    613      1.1     skrll   /* TLS type for each local got entry.  */
    614      1.1     skrll   char *local_got_tls_type;
    615      1.1     skrll };
    616      1.1     skrll 
    617      1.1     skrll #define elf_s390_tdata(abfd) \
    618      1.1     skrll   ((struct elf_s390_obj_tdata *) (abfd)->tdata.any)
    619      1.1     skrll 
    620  1.1.1.3  christos #define elf_s390_local_plt(abfd) \
    621  1.1.1.3  christos   (elf_s390_tdata (abfd)->local_plt)
    622  1.1.1.3  christos 
    623      1.1     skrll #define elf_s390_local_got_tls_type(abfd) \
    624      1.1     skrll   (elf_s390_tdata (abfd)->local_got_tls_type)
    625      1.1     skrll 
    626      1.1     skrll #define is_s390_elf(bfd)				\
    627      1.1     skrll   (bfd_get_flavour (bfd) == bfd_target_elf_flavour	\
    628      1.1     skrll    && elf_tdata (bfd) != NULL				\
    629  1.1.1.2  christos    && elf_object_id (bfd) == S390_ELF_DATA)
    630      1.1     skrll 
    631      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    632      1.1     skrll elf_s390_mkobject (bfd *abfd)
    633      1.1     skrll {
    634      1.1     skrll   return bfd_elf_allocate_object (abfd, sizeof (struct elf_s390_obj_tdata),
    635  1.1.1.2  christos 				  S390_ELF_DATA);
    636      1.1     skrll }
    637      1.1     skrll 
    638      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    639  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_object_p (bfd *abfd)
    640      1.1     skrll {
    641      1.1     skrll   /* Set the right machine number for an s390 elf32 file.  */
    642      1.1     skrll   return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_s390, bfd_mach_s390_64);
    643      1.1     skrll }
    644      1.1     skrll 
    645      1.1     skrll /* s390 ELF linker hash table.  */
    646      1.1     skrll 
    647      1.1     skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table
    648      1.1     skrll {
    649      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table elf;
    650      1.1     skrll 
    651      1.1     skrll   /* Short-cuts to get to dynamic linker sections.  */
    652      1.1     skrll   asection *sdynbss;
    653      1.1     skrll   asection *srelbss;
    654  1.1.1.3  christos   asection *irelifunc;
    655      1.1     skrll 
    656      1.1     skrll   union {
    657      1.1     skrll     bfd_signed_vma refcount;
    658      1.1     skrll     bfd_vma offset;
    659      1.1     skrll   } tls_ldm_got;
    660      1.1     skrll 
    661  1.1.1.2  christos   /* Small local sym cache.  */
    662  1.1.1.2  christos   struct sym_cache sym_cache;
    663      1.1     skrll };
    664      1.1     skrll 
    665      1.1     skrll /* Get the s390 ELF linker hash table from a link_info structure.  */
    666      1.1     skrll 
    667      1.1     skrll #define elf_s390_hash_table(p) \
    668  1.1.1.2  christos   (elf_hash_table_id ((struct elf_link_hash_table *) ((p)->hash)) \
    669  1.1.1.2  christos   == S390_ELF_DATA ? ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *) ((p)->hash)) : NULL)
    670      1.1     skrll 
    671  1.1.1.3  christos #define ELF64 1
    672  1.1.1.3  christos #include "elf-s390-common.c"
    673  1.1.1.3  christos 
    674      1.1     skrll /* Create an entry in an s390 ELF linker hash table.  */
    675      1.1     skrll 
    676      1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    677  1.1.1.3  christos link_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    678  1.1.1.3  christos 		   struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    679  1.1.1.3  christos 		   const char *string)
    680      1.1     skrll {
    681      1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    682      1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    683      1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    684      1.1     skrll     {
    685      1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    686      1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry));
    687      1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    688      1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    689      1.1     skrll     }
    690      1.1     skrll 
    691      1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    692      1.1     skrll   entry = _bfd_elf_link_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    693      1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    694      1.1     skrll     {
    695      1.1     skrll       struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh;
    696      1.1     skrll 
    697      1.1     skrll       eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) entry;
    698      1.1     skrll       eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
    699      1.1     skrll       eh->gotplt_refcount = 0;
    700      1.1     skrll       eh->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
    701  1.1.1.3  christos       eh->ifunc_resolver_address = 0;
    702  1.1.1.3  christos       eh->ifunc_resolver_section = NULL;
    703      1.1     skrll     }
    704      1.1     skrll 
    705      1.1     skrll   return entry;
    706      1.1     skrll }
    707      1.1     skrll 
    708      1.1     skrll /* Create an s390 ELF linker hash table.  */
    709      1.1     skrll 
    710      1.1     skrll static struct bfd_link_hash_table *
    711  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_link_hash_table_create (bfd *abfd)
    712      1.1     skrll {
    713      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *ret;
    714      1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt = sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table);
    715      1.1     skrll 
    716  1.1.1.4  christos   ret = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *) bfd_zmalloc (amt);
    717      1.1     skrll   if (ret == NULL)
    718      1.1     skrll     return NULL;
    719      1.1     skrll 
    720      1.1     skrll   if (!_bfd_elf_link_hash_table_init (&ret->elf, abfd, link_hash_newfunc,
    721  1.1.1.2  christos 				      sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry),
    722  1.1.1.2  christos 				      S390_ELF_DATA))
    723      1.1     skrll     {
    724      1.1     skrll       free (ret);
    725      1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    726      1.1     skrll     }
    727      1.1     skrll 
    728      1.1     skrll   return &ret->elf.root;
    729      1.1     skrll }
    730      1.1     skrll 
    731      1.1     skrll /* Create .got, .gotplt, and .rela.got sections in DYNOBJ, and set up
    732      1.1     skrll    shortcuts to them in our hash table.  */
    733      1.1     skrll 
    734      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    735  1.1.1.2  christos create_got_section (bfd *dynobj,
    736  1.1.1.2  christos 		    struct bfd_link_info *info)
    737      1.1     skrll {
    738      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
    739      1.1     skrll 
    740      1.1     skrll   if (! _bfd_elf_create_got_section (dynobj, info))
    741      1.1     skrll     return FALSE;
    742      1.1     skrll 
    743      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
    744  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    745  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
    746  1.1.1.2  christos 
    747  1.1.1.3  christos   htab->elf.sgot = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".got");
    748  1.1.1.3  christos   htab->elf.sgotplt = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".got.plt");
    749  1.1.1.3  christos   htab->elf.srelgot = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".rela.got");
    750  1.1.1.3  christos   if (!htab->elf.sgot || !htab->elf.sgotplt || !htab->elf.srelgot)
    751      1.1     skrll     abort ();
    752      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    753      1.1     skrll }
    754      1.1     skrll 
    755      1.1     skrll /* Create .plt, .rela.plt, .got, .got.plt, .rela.got, .dynbss, and
    756      1.1     skrll    .rela.bss sections in DYNOBJ, and set up shortcuts to them in our
    757      1.1     skrll    hash table.  */
    758      1.1     skrll 
    759      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    760  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_create_dynamic_sections (bfd *dynobj,
    761  1.1.1.2  christos 				  struct bfd_link_info *info)
    762      1.1     skrll {
    763      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
    764      1.1     skrll 
    765      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
    766  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    767  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
    768  1.1.1.2  christos 
    769  1.1.1.3  christos   if (!htab->elf.sgot && !create_got_section (dynobj, info))
    770      1.1     skrll     return FALSE;
    771      1.1     skrll 
    772      1.1     skrll   if (!_bfd_elf_create_dynamic_sections (dynobj, info))
    773      1.1     skrll     return FALSE;
    774      1.1     skrll 
    775  1.1.1.3  christos   htab->elf.splt = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".plt");
    776  1.1.1.3  christos   htab->elf.srelplt = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".rela.plt");
    777  1.1.1.3  christos   htab->sdynbss = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".dynbss");
    778  1.1.1.4  christos   if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
    779  1.1.1.3  christos     htab->srelbss = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".rela.bss");
    780      1.1     skrll 
    781  1.1.1.3  christos   if (!htab->elf.splt || !htab->elf.srelplt || !htab->sdynbss
    782  1.1.1.4  christos       || (!bfd_link_pic (info) && !htab->srelbss))
    783      1.1     skrll     abort ();
    784      1.1     skrll 
    785      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    786      1.1     skrll }
    787      1.1     skrll 
    788      1.1     skrll /* Copy the extra info we tack onto an elf_link_hash_entry.  */
    789      1.1     skrll 
    790      1.1     skrll static void
    791  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_copy_indirect_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
    792  1.1.1.3  christos 			       struct elf_link_hash_entry *dir,
    793  1.1.1.3  christos 			       struct elf_link_hash_entry *ind)
    794      1.1     skrll {
    795      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *edir, *eind;
    796      1.1     skrll 
    797      1.1     skrll   edir = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) dir;
    798      1.1     skrll   eind = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) ind;
    799      1.1     skrll 
    800      1.1     skrll   if (eind->dyn_relocs != NULL)
    801      1.1     skrll     {
    802      1.1     skrll       if (edir->dyn_relocs != NULL)
    803      1.1     skrll 	{
    804  1.1.1.3  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp;
    805  1.1.1.3  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
    806      1.1     skrll 
    807      1.1     skrll 	  /* Add reloc counts against the indirect sym to the direct sym
    808      1.1     skrll 	     list.  Merge any entries against the same section.  */
    809      1.1     skrll 	  for (pp = &eind->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; )
    810      1.1     skrll 	    {
    811  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs *q;
    812      1.1     skrll 
    813      1.1     skrll 	      for (q = edir->dyn_relocs; q != NULL; q = q->next)
    814      1.1     skrll 		if (q->sec == p->sec)
    815      1.1     skrll 		  {
    816      1.1     skrll 		    q->pc_count += p->pc_count;
    817      1.1     skrll 		    q->count += p->count;
    818      1.1     skrll 		    *pp = p->next;
    819      1.1     skrll 		    break;
    820      1.1     skrll 		  }
    821      1.1     skrll 	      if (q == NULL)
    822      1.1     skrll 		pp = &p->next;
    823      1.1     skrll 	    }
    824      1.1     skrll 	  *pp = edir->dyn_relocs;
    825      1.1     skrll 	}
    826      1.1     skrll 
    827      1.1     skrll       edir->dyn_relocs = eind->dyn_relocs;
    828      1.1     skrll       eind->dyn_relocs = NULL;
    829      1.1     skrll     }
    830      1.1     skrll 
    831      1.1     skrll   if (ind->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
    832      1.1     skrll       && dir->got.refcount <= 0)
    833      1.1     skrll     {
    834      1.1     skrll       edir->tls_type = eind->tls_type;
    835      1.1     skrll       eind->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
    836      1.1     skrll     }
    837      1.1     skrll 
    838      1.1     skrll   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
    839      1.1     skrll       && ind->root.type != bfd_link_hash_indirect
    840      1.1     skrll       && dir->dynamic_adjusted)
    841      1.1     skrll     {
    842      1.1     skrll       /* If called to transfer flags for a weakdef during processing
    843      1.1     skrll 	 of elf_adjust_dynamic_symbol, don't copy non_got_ref.
    844      1.1     skrll 	 We clear it ourselves for ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS.  */
    845      1.1     skrll       dir->ref_dynamic |= ind->ref_dynamic;
    846      1.1     skrll       dir->ref_regular |= ind->ref_regular;
    847      1.1     skrll       dir->ref_regular_nonweak |= ind->ref_regular_nonweak;
    848      1.1     skrll       dir->needs_plt |= ind->needs_plt;
    849      1.1     skrll     }
    850      1.1     skrll   else
    851      1.1     skrll     _bfd_elf_link_hash_copy_indirect (info, dir, ind);
    852      1.1     skrll }
    853      1.1     skrll 
    854      1.1     skrll static int
    855  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_tls_transition (struct bfd_link_info *info,
    856  1.1.1.3  christos 			 int r_type,
    857  1.1.1.3  christos 			 int is_local)
    858      1.1     skrll {
    859  1.1.1.4  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
    860      1.1     skrll     return r_type;
    861      1.1     skrll 
    862      1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
    863      1.1     skrll     {
    864      1.1     skrll     case R_390_TLS_GD64:
    865      1.1     skrll     case R_390_TLS_IE64:
    866      1.1     skrll       if (is_local)
    867      1.1     skrll 	return R_390_TLS_LE64;
    868      1.1     skrll       return R_390_TLS_IE64;
    869      1.1     skrll     case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
    870      1.1     skrll       if (is_local)
    871      1.1     skrll 	return R_390_TLS_LE64;
    872      1.1     skrll       return R_390_TLS_GOTIE64;
    873      1.1     skrll     case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
    874      1.1     skrll       return R_390_TLS_LE64;
    875      1.1     skrll     }
    876      1.1     skrll 
    877      1.1     skrll   return r_type;
    878      1.1     skrll }
    879      1.1     skrll 
    880      1.1     skrll /* Look through the relocs for a section during the first phase, and
    881      1.1     skrll    allocate space in the global offset table or procedure linkage
    882      1.1     skrll    table.  */
    883      1.1     skrll 
    884      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    885  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_check_relocs (bfd *abfd,
    886  1.1.1.2  christos 		       struct bfd_link_info *info,
    887  1.1.1.2  christos 		       asection *sec,
    888  1.1.1.2  christos 		       const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs)
    889      1.1     skrll {
    890      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
    891      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
    892      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes;
    893      1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rel;
    894      1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rel_end;
    895      1.1     skrll   asection *sreloc;
    896      1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
    897      1.1     skrll   int tls_type, old_tls_type;
    898      1.1     skrll 
    899  1.1.1.4  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
    900      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
    901      1.1     skrll 
    902      1.1     skrll   BFD_ASSERT (is_s390_elf (abfd));
    903      1.1     skrll 
    904      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
    905  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    906  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
    907  1.1.1.2  christos 
    908      1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (abfd);
    909      1.1     skrll   sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (abfd);
    910      1.1     skrll   local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
    911      1.1     skrll 
    912      1.1     skrll   sreloc = NULL;
    913      1.1     skrll 
    914      1.1     skrll   rel_end = relocs + sec->reloc_count;
    915      1.1     skrll   for (rel = relocs; rel < rel_end; rel++)
    916      1.1     skrll     {
    917      1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
    918      1.1     skrll       unsigned long r_symndx;
    919      1.1     skrll       struct elf_link_hash_entry *h;
    920  1.1.1.3  christos       Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
    921      1.1     skrll 
    922      1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rel->r_info);
    923      1.1     skrll 
    924      1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx >= NUM_SHDR_ENTRIES (symtab_hdr))
    925      1.1     skrll 	{
    926      1.1     skrll 	  (*_bfd_error_handler) (_("%B: bad symbol index: %d"),
    927      1.1     skrll 				 abfd,
    928      1.1     skrll 				 r_symndx);
    929      1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
    930      1.1     skrll 	}
    931      1.1     skrll 
    932      1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
    933  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
    934  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* A local symbol.  */
    935  1.1.1.3  christos 	  isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache,
    936  1.1.1.3  christos 					abfd, r_symndx);
    937  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (isym == NULL)
    938  1.1.1.3  christos 	    return FALSE;
    939  1.1.1.3  christos 
    940  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (ELF_ST_TYPE (isym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
    941  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
    942  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct plt_entry *plt;
    943  1.1.1.3  christos 
    944  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
    945  1.1.1.3  christos 		htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
    946  1.1.1.3  christos 
    947  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (!s390_elf_create_ifunc_sections (htab->elf.dynobj, info))
    948  1.1.1.3  christos 		return FALSE;
    949  1.1.1.3  christos 
    950  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
    951  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
    952  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (!elf_s390_allocate_local_syminfo (abfd, symtab_hdr))
    953  1.1.1.3  christos 		    return FALSE;
    954  1.1.1.3  christos 		  local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
    955  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
    956  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt = elf_s390_local_plt (abfd);
    957  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt[r_symndx].plt.refcount++;
    958  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
    959  1.1.1.3  christos 	  h = NULL;
    960  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
    961      1.1     skrll       else
    962      1.1     skrll 	{
    963      1.1     skrll 	  h = sym_hashes[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info];
    964      1.1     skrll 	  while (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
    965      1.1     skrll 		 || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
    966      1.1     skrll 	    h = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) h->root.u.i.link;
    967  1.1.1.4  christos 
    968  1.1.1.4  christos 	  /* PR15323, ref flags aren't set for references in the same
    969  1.1.1.4  christos 	     object.  */
    970  1.1.1.4  christos 	  h->root.non_ir_ref = 1;
    971      1.1     skrll 	}
    972      1.1     skrll 
    973      1.1     skrll       /* Create got section and local_got_refcounts array if they
    974      1.1     skrll 	 are needed.  */
    975      1.1     skrll       r_type = elf_s390_tls_transition (info,
    976      1.1     skrll 					ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info),
    977      1.1     skrll 					h == NULL);
    978      1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
    979      1.1     skrll 	{
    980      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT12:
    981      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT16:
    982      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT20:
    983      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT32:
    984      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT64:
    985      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTENT:
    986      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT12:
    987      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT16:
    988      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT20:
    989      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT32:
    990      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT64:
    991      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
    992      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GD64:
    993      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
    994      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
    995      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
    996      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
    997      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IE64:
    998      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
    999      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL
   1000      1.1     skrll 	      && local_got_refcounts == NULL)
   1001      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1002  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (!elf_s390_allocate_local_syminfo (abfd, symtab_hdr))
   1003      1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   1004  1.1.1.3  christos 	      local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
   1005      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1006  1.1.1.3  christos 
   1007      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
   1008      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF16:
   1009      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF32:
   1010      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF64:
   1011      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPC:
   1012      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
   1013  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   1014      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1015      1.1     skrll 	      if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
   1016      1.1     skrll 		htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
   1017      1.1     skrll 	      if (!create_got_section (htab->elf.dynobj, info))
   1018      1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   1019      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1020      1.1     skrll 	}
   1021      1.1     skrll 
   1022  1.1.1.3  christos       if (h != NULL)
   1023  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   1024  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
   1025  1.1.1.3  christos 	    htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
   1026  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (!s390_elf_create_ifunc_sections (htab->elf.dynobj, info))
   1027  1.1.1.3  christos 	    return FALSE;
   1028  1.1.1.3  christos 
   1029  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Make sure an IFUNC symbol defined in a non-shared object
   1030  1.1.1.3  christos 	     always gets a PLT slot.  */
   1031  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
   1032  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   1033  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* The symbol is called by the dynamic loader in order
   1034  1.1.1.3  christos 		 to resolve the relocation.  So it is in fact also
   1035  1.1.1.3  christos 		 referenced.  */
   1036  1.1.1.3  christos 	      h->ref_regular = 1;
   1037  1.1.1.3  christos 	      h->needs_plt = 1;
   1038  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   1039  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
   1040  1.1.1.3  christos 
   1041      1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   1042      1.1     skrll 	{
   1043      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPC:
   1044      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
   1045  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* These relocs do not need a GOT slot.  They just load the
   1046  1.1.1.3  christos 	     GOT pointer itself or address something else relative to
   1047  1.1.1.3  christos 	     the GOT.  Since the GOT pointer has been set up above we
   1048  1.1.1.3  christos 	     are done.  */
   1049      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1050  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTOFF16:
   1051  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTOFF32:
   1052  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTOFF64:
   1053  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h == NULL || !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) || !h->def_regular)
   1054  1.1.1.4  christos 	    break;
   1055      1.1     skrll 
   1056  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT12DBL:
   1057      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT16DBL:
   1058  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT24DBL:
   1059      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32:
   1060      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32DBL:
   1061      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT64:
   1062      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF16:
   1063      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF32:
   1064      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF64:
   1065      1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires a procedure linkage table entry.  We
   1066      1.1     skrll 	     actually build the entry in adjust_dynamic_symbol,
   1067      1.1     skrll 	     because this might be a case of linking PIC code which is
   1068      1.1     skrll 	     never referenced by a dynamic object, in which case we
   1069      1.1     skrll 	     don't need to generate a procedure linkage table entry
   1070      1.1     skrll 	     after all.  */
   1071      1.1     skrll 
   1072      1.1     skrll 	  /* If this is a local symbol, we resolve it directly without
   1073      1.1     skrll 	     creating a procedure linkage table entry.  */
   1074      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   1075      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1076      1.1     skrll 	      h->needs_plt = 1;
   1077      1.1     skrll 	      h->plt.refcount += 1;
   1078      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1079      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1080      1.1     skrll 
   1081      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT12:
   1082      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT16:
   1083      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT20:
   1084      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT32:
   1085      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT64:
   1086      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
   1087      1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires either a procedure linkage table entry
   1088      1.1     skrll 	     or an entry in the local got. We actually build the entry
   1089      1.1     skrll 	     in adjust_dynamic_symbol because whether this is really a
   1090      1.1     skrll 	     global reference can change and with it the fact if we have
   1091      1.1     skrll 	     to create a plt entry or a local got entry. To be able to
   1092      1.1     skrll 	     make a once global symbol a local one we have to keep track
   1093      1.1     skrll 	     of the number of gotplt references that exist for this
   1094      1.1     skrll 	     symbol.  */
   1095      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   1096      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1097      1.1     skrll 	      ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h)->gotplt_refcount++;
   1098      1.1     skrll 	      h->needs_plt = 1;
   1099      1.1     skrll 	      h->plt.refcount += 1;
   1100      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1101      1.1     skrll 	  else
   1102      1.1     skrll 	    local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1103      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1104      1.1     skrll 
   1105      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
   1106      1.1     skrll 	  htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1;
   1107      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1108      1.1     skrll 
   1109      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IE64:
   1110      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
   1111      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
   1112      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
   1113      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
   1114  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1115      1.1     skrll 	    info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
   1116      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through */
   1117      1.1     skrll 
   1118      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT12:
   1119      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT16:
   1120      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT20:
   1121      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT32:
   1122      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT64:
   1123      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTENT:
   1124      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GD64:
   1125      1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires a global offset table entry.  */
   1126      1.1     skrll 	  switch (r_type)
   1127      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1128      1.1     skrll 	    default:
   1129      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOT12:
   1130      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOT16:
   1131      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOT20:
   1132      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOT32:
   1133      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOTENT:
   1134      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_NORMAL;
   1135      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1136      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_GD64:
   1137      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_GD;
   1138      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1139      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_IE64:
   1140      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
   1141      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE;
   1142      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1143      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
   1144      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
   1145      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
   1146      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE_NLT;
   1147      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1148      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1149      1.1     skrll 
   1150      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   1151      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1152      1.1     skrll 	      h->got.refcount += 1;
   1153      1.1     skrll 	      old_tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   1154      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1155      1.1     skrll 	  else
   1156      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1157      1.1     skrll 	      local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1158      1.1     skrll 	      old_tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx];
   1159      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1160      1.1     skrll 	  /* If a TLS symbol is accessed using IE at least once,
   1161      1.1     skrll 	     there is no point to use dynamic model for it.  */
   1162      1.1     skrll 	  if (old_tls_type != tls_type && old_tls_type != GOT_UNKNOWN)
   1163      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1164      1.1     skrll 	      if (old_tls_type == GOT_NORMAL || tls_type == GOT_NORMAL)
   1165      1.1     skrll 		{
   1166      1.1     skrll 		  (*_bfd_error_handler)
   1167      1.1     skrll 		    (_("%B: `%s' accessed both as normal and thread local symbol"),
   1168      1.1     skrll 		     abfd, h->root.root.string);
   1169      1.1     skrll 		  return FALSE;
   1170      1.1     skrll 		}
   1171      1.1     skrll 	      if (old_tls_type > tls_type)
   1172      1.1     skrll 		tls_type = old_tls_type;
   1173      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1174      1.1     skrll 
   1175      1.1     skrll 	  if (old_tls_type != tls_type)
   1176      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1177      1.1     skrll 	      if (h != NULL)
   1178      1.1     skrll 		elf_s390_hash_entry (h)->tls_type = tls_type;
   1179      1.1     skrll 	      else
   1180      1.1     skrll 		elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx] = tls_type;
   1181      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1182      1.1     skrll 
   1183      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type != R_390_TLS_IE64)
   1184      1.1     skrll 	    break;
   1185      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through */
   1186      1.1     skrll 
   1187      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LE64:
   1188  1.1.1.4  christos 	  /* For static linking and executables this reloc will be
   1189  1.1.1.4  christos 	     calculated at linktime otherwise a TLS_TPOFF runtime
   1190  1.1.1.4  christos 	     reloc will be generated.  */
   1191  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LE64 && bfd_link_pie (info))
   1192  1.1.1.4  christos 	    break;
   1193  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1194  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   1195      1.1     skrll 	    break;
   1196      1.1     skrll 	  info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
   1197      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through */
   1198      1.1     skrll 
   1199      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_8:
   1200      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_16:
   1201      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_32:
   1202      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_64:
   1203  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC12DBL:
   1204      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16:
   1205      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16DBL:
   1206  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC24DBL:
   1207      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32:
   1208      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32DBL:
   1209      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC64:
   1210  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h != NULL && bfd_link_executable (info))
   1211      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1212      1.1     skrll 	      /* If this reloc is in a read-only section, we might
   1213      1.1     skrll 		 need a copy reloc.  We can't check reliably at this
   1214      1.1     skrll 		 stage whether the section is read-only, as input
   1215      1.1     skrll 		 sections have not yet been mapped to output sections.
   1216      1.1     skrll 		 Tentatively set the flag for now, and correct in
   1217      1.1     skrll 		 adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   1218      1.1     skrll 	      h->non_got_ref = 1;
   1219      1.1     skrll 
   1220  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   1221  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   1222  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* We may need a .plt entry if the function this reloc
   1223  1.1.1.3  christos 		     refers to is in a shared lib.  */
   1224  1.1.1.3  christos 		  h->plt.refcount += 1;
   1225  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   1226      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1227      1.1     skrll 
   1228      1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, and this is a reloc
   1229      1.1     skrll 	     against a global symbol, or a non PC relative reloc
   1230      1.1     skrll 	     against a local symbol, then we need to copy the reloc
   1231      1.1     skrll 	     into the shared library.  However, if we are linking with
   1232      1.1     skrll 	     -Bsymbolic, we do not need to copy a reloc against a
   1233      1.1     skrll 	     global symbol which is defined in an object we are
   1234      1.1     skrll 	     including in the link (i.e., DEF_REGULAR is set).  At
   1235      1.1     skrll 	     this point we have not seen all the input files, so it is
   1236      1.1     skrll 	     possible that DEF_REGULAR is not set now but will be set
   1237      1.1     skrll 	     later (it is never cleared).  In case of a weak definition,
   1238      1.1     skrll 	     DEF_REGULAR may be cleared later by a strong definition in
   1239      1.1     skrll 	     a shared library. We account for that possibility below by
   1240      1.1     skrll 	     storing information in the relocs_copied field of the hash
   1241      1.1     skrll 	     table entry.  A similar situation occurs when creating
   1242      1.1     skrll 	     shared libraries and symbol visibility changes render the
   1243      1.1     skrll 	     symbol local.
   1244      1.1     skrll 
   1245      1.1     skrll 	     If on the other hand, we are creating an executable, we
   1246      1.1     skrll 	     may need to keep relocations for symbols satisfied by a
   1247      1.1     skrll 	     dynamic library if we manage to avoid copy relocs for the
   1248      1.1     skrll 	     symbol.  */
   1249  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
   1250      1.1     skrll 	       && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
   1251      1.1     skrll 	       && ((ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC16
   1252  1.1.1.4  christos 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC12DBL
   1253      1.1     skrll 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC16DBL
   1254  1.1.1.4  christos 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC24DBL
   1255      1.1     skrll 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC32
   1256      1.1     skrll 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC32DBL
   1257      1.1     skrll 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC64)
   1258      1.1     skrll 		   || (h != NULL
   1259  1.1.1.2  christos 		       && (! SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, h)
   1260      1.1     skrll 			   || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1261      1.1     skrll 			   || !h->def_regular))))
   1262      1.1     skrll 	      || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1263  1.1.1.4  christos 		  && !bfd_link_pic (info)
   1264      1.1     skrll 		  && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
   1265      1.1     skrll 		  && h != NULL
   1266      1.1     skrll 		  && (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1267      1.1     skrll 		      || !h->def_regular)))
   1268      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1269  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1270  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs **head;
   1271      1.1     skrll 
   1272      1.1     skrll 	      /* We must copy these reloc types into the output file.
   1273      1.1     skrll 		 Create a reloc section in dynobj and make room for
   1274      1.1     skrll 		 this reloc.  */
   1275      1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   1276      1.1     skrll 		{
   1277      1.1     skrll 		  if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
   1278      1.1     skrll 		    htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
   1279      1.1     skrll 
   1280  1.1.1.2  christos 		  sreloc = _bfd_elf_make_dynamic_reloc_section
   1281  1.1.1.2  christos 		    (sec, htab->elf.dynobj, 3, abfd, /*rela?*/ TRUE);
   1282      1.1     skrll 
   1283  1.1.1.2  christos 		  if (sreloc == NULL)
   1284  1.1.1.2  christos 		    return FALSE;
   1285      1.1     skrll 		}
   1286      1.1     skrll 
   1287      1.1     skrll 	      /* If this is a global symbol, we count the number of
   1288      1.1     skrll 		 relocations we need for this symbol.  */
   1289      1.1     skrll 	      if (h != NULL)
   1290      1.1     skrll 		{
   1291      1.1     skrll 		  head = &((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h)->dyn_relocs;
   1292      1.1     skrll 		}
   1293      1.1     skrll 	      else
   1294      1.1     skrll 		{
   1295      1.1     skrll 		  /* Track dynamic relocs needed for local syms too.
   1296      1.1     skrll 		     We really need local syms available to do this
   1297      1.1     skrll 		     easily.  Oh well.  */
   1298      1.1     skrll 		  asection *s;
   1299      1.1     skrll 		  void *vpp;
   1300      1.1     skrll 
   1301  1.1.1.2  christos 		  isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache,
   1302  1.1.1.2  christos 						abfd, r_symndx);
   1303  1.1.1.2  christos 		  if (isym == NULL)
   1304      1.1     skrll 		    return FALSE;
   1305      1.1     skrll 
   1306  1.1.1.2  christos 		  s = bfd_section_from_elf_index (abfd, isym->st_shndx);
   1307  1.1.1.2  christos 		  if (s == NULL)
   1308  1.1.1.2  christos 		    s = sec;
   1309  1.1.1.2  christos 
   1310      1.1     skrll 		  vpp = &elf_section_data (s)->local_dynrel;
   1311  1.1.1.3  christos 		  head = (struct elf_dyn_relocs **) vpp;
   1312      1.1     skrll 		}
   1313      1.1     skrll 
   1314      1.1     skrll 	      p = *head;
   1315      1.1     skrll 	      if (p == NULL || p->sec != sec)
   1316      1.1     skrll 		{
   1317      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_size_type amt = sizeof *p;
   1318  1.1.1.3  christos 		  p = ((struct elf_dyn_relocs *)
   1319      1.1     skrll 		       bfd_alloc (htab->elf.dynobj, amt));
   1320      1.1     skrll 		  if (p == NULL)
   1321      1.1     skrll 		    return FALSE;
   1322      1.1     skrll 		  p->next = *head;
   1323      1.1     skrll 		  *head = p;
   1324      1.1     skrll 		  p->sec = sec;
   1325      1.1     skrll 		  p->count = 0;
   1326      1.1     skrll 		  p->pc_count = 0;
   1327      1.1     skrll 		}
   1328      1.1     skrll 
   1329      1.1     skrll 	      p->count += 1;
   1330      1.1     skrll 	      if (ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16
   1331  1.1.1.4  christos 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC12DBL
   1332  1.1.1.4  christos 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16DBL
   1333      1.1     skrll 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16DBL
   1334      1.1     skrll 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC32
   1335      1.1     skrll 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC32DBL
   1336      1.1     skrll 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC64)
   1337      1.1     skrll 		p->pc_count += 1;
   1338      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1339      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1340      1.1     skrll 
   1341      1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes the C++ object vtable hierarchy.
   1342      1.1     skrll 	     Reconstruct it for later use during GC.  */
   1343      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1344      1.1     skrll 	  if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtinherit (abfd, sec, h, rel->r_offset))
   1345      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1346      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1347      1.1     skrll 
   1348      1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes which C++ vtable entries are actually
   1349      1.1     skrll 	     used.  Record for later use during GC.  */
   1350      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1351      1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT (h != NULL);
   1352      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL
   1353      1.1     skrll 	      && !bfd_elf_gc_record_vtentry (abfd, sec, h, rel->r_addend))
   1354      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1355      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1356      1.1     skrll 
   1357      1.1     skrll 	default:
   1358      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1359      1.1     skrll 	}
   1360      1.1     skrll     }
   1361      1.1     skrll 
   1362      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1363      1.1     skrll }
   1364      1.1     skrll 
   1365      1.1     skrll /* Return the section that should be marked against GC for a given
   1366      1.1     skrll    relocation.  */
   1367      1.1     skrll 
   1368      1.1     skrll static asection *
   1369      1.1     skrll elf_s390_gc_mark_hook (asection *sec,
   1370      1.1     skrll 		       struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1371      1.1     skrll 		       Elf_Internal_Rela *rel,
   1372      1.1     skrll 		       struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
   1373      1.1     skrll 		       Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   1374      1.1     skrll {
   1375      1.1     skrll   if (h != NULL)
   1376      1.1     skrll     switch (ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info))
   1377      1.1     skrll       {
   1378      1.1     skrll       case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1379      1.1     skrll       case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1380      1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
   1381      1.1     skrll       }
   1382      1.1     skrll 
   1383      1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elf_gc_mark_hook (sec, info, rel, h, sym);
   1384      1.1     skrll }
   1385      1.1     skrll 
   1386      1.1     skrll /* Update the got entry reference counts for the section being removed.  */
   1387      1.1     skrll 
   1388      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1389      1.1     skrll elf_s390_gc_sweep_hook (bfd *abfd,
   1390      1.1     skrll 			struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1391      1.1     skrll 			asection *sec,
   1392      1.1     skrll 			const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs)
   1393      1.1     skrll {
   1394  1.1.1.2  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   1395      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   1396      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes;
   1397      1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1398      1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rel, *relend;
   1399      1.1     skrll 
   1400  1.1.1.4  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   1401      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1402      1.1     skrll 
   1403  1.1.1.2  christos   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   1404  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1405  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   1406  1.1.1.2  christos 
   1407      1.1     skrll   elf_section_data (sec)->local_dynrel = NULL;
   1408      1.1     skrll 
   1409      1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (abfd);
   1410      1.1     skrll   sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (abfd);
   1411      1.1     skrll   local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
   1412      1.1     skrll 
   1413      1.1     skrll   relend = relocs + sec->reloc_count;
   1414      1.1     skrll   for (rel = relocs; rel < relend; rel++)
   1415      1.1     skrll     {
   1416      1.1     skrll       unsigned long r_symndx;
   1417      1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
   1418      1.1     skrll       struct elf_link_hash_entry *h = NULL;
   1419      1.1     skrll 
   1420      1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rel->r_info);
   1421      1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx >= symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   1422      1.1     skrll 	{
   1423      1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh;
   1424  1.1.1.3  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp;
   1425  1.1.1.3  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1426      1.1     skrll 
   1427      1.1     skrll 	  h = sym_hashes[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info];
   1428      1.1     skrll 	  while (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   1429      1.1     skrll 		 || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   1430      1.1     skrll 	    h = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) h->root.u.i.link;
   1431      1.1     skrll 	  eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h;
   1432      1.1     skrll 
   1433      1.1     skrll 	  for (pp = &eh->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; pp = &p->next)
   1434      1.1     skrll 	    if (p->sec == sec)
   1435      1.1     skrll 	      {
   1436      1.1     skrll 		/* Everything must go for SEC.  */
   1437      1.1     skrll 		*pp = p->next;
   1438      1.1     skrll 		break;
   1439      1.1     skrll 	      }
   1440      1.1     skrll 	}
   1441  1.1.1.3  christos       else
   1442  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   1443  1.1.1.3  christos 	  Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
   1444  1.1.1.3  christos 
   1445  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* A local symbol.  */
   1446  1.1.1.3  christos 	  isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache,
   1447  1.1.1.3  christos 					abfd, r_symndx);
   1448  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (isym == NULL)
   1449  1.1.1.3  christos 	    return FALSE;
   1450  1.1.1.3  christos 
   1451  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (ELF_ST_TYPE (isym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   1452  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   1453  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct plt_entry *plt = elf_s390_local_plt (abfd);
   1454  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (plt[r_symndx].plt.refcount > 0)
   1455  1.1.1.3  christos 		plt[r_symndx].plt.refcount--;
   1456  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   1457  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
   1458      1.1     skrll 
   1459      1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info);
   1460      1.1     skrll       r_type = elf_s390_tls_transition (info, r_type, h != NULL);
   1461      1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   1462      1.1     skrll 	{
   1463      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
   1464  1.1.1.2  christos 	  if (htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount > 0)
   1465  1.1.1.2  christos 	    htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount -= 1;
   1466      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1467  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTOFF16:
   1468  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTOFF32:
   1469  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTOFF64:
   1470  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h != NULL && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
   1471  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   1472  1.1.1.4  christos 	      h->plt.refcount--;
   1473  1.1.1.4  christos 	      break;
   1474  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   1475  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1476  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTPC:
   1477  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
   1478  1.1.1.4  christos 	  break;
   1479      1.1     skrll 
   1480      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GD64:
   1481      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IE64:
   1482      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
   1483      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
   1484      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
   1485      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
   1486      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT12:
   1487      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT16:
   1488      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT20:
   1489      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT32:
   1490      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT64:
   1491      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTENT:
   1492      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   1493      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1494      1.1     skrll 	      if (h->got.refcount > 0)
   1495      1.1     skrll 		h->got.refcount -= 1;
   1496      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1497      1.1     skrll 	  else if (local_got_refcounts != NULL)
   1498      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1499      1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] > 0)
   1500      1.1     skrll 		local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] -= 1;
   1501      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1502      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1503      1.1     skrll 
   1504      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_8:
   1505      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_12:
   1506      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_16:
   1507      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_20:
   1508      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_32:
   1509      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_64:
   1510      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16:
   1511  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC12DBL:
   1512      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16DBL:
   1513  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC24DBL:
   1514      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32:
   1515      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32DBL:
   1516      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC64:
   1517  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1518      1.1     skrll 	    break;
   1519      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through */
   1520      1.1     skrll 
   1521  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT12DBL:
   1522      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT16DBL:
   1523  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT24DBL:
   1524      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32:
   1525      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32DBL:
   1526      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT64:
   1527      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF16:
   1528      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF32:
   1529      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF64:
   1530      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   1531      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1532      1.1     skrll 	      if (h->plt.refcount > 0)
   1533      1.1     skrll 		h->plt.refcount -= 1;
   1534      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1535      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1536      1.1     skrll 
   1537      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT12:
   1538      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT16:
   1539      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT20:
   1540      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT32:
   1541      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT64:
   1542      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
   1543      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   1544      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1545      1.1     skrll 	      if (h->plt.refcount > 0)
   1546      1.1     skrll 		{
   1547      1.1     skrll 		  ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h)->gotplt_refcount--;
   1548      1.1     skrll 		  h->plt.refcount -= 1;
   1549      1.1     skrll 		}
   1550      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1551      1.1     skrll 	  else if (local_got_refcounts != NULL)
   1552      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1553      1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] > 0)
   1554      1.1     skrll 		local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] -= 1;
   1555      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1556      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1557      1.1     skrll 
   1558      1.1     skrll 	default:
   1559      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1560      1.1     skrll 	}
   1561      1.1     skrll     }
   1562      1.1     skrll 
   1563      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1564      1.1     skrll }
   1565      1.1     skrll 
   1566      1.1     skrll /* Make sure we emit a GOT entry if the symbol was supposed to have a PLT
   1567      1.1     skrll    entry but we found we will not create any.  Called when we find we will
   1568      1.1     skrll    not have any PLT for this symbol, by for example
   1569      1.1     skrll    elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol when we're doing a proper dynamic link,
   1570      1.1     skrll    or elf_s390_size_dynamic_sections if no dynamic sections will be
   1571      1.1     skrll    created (we're only linking static objects).  */
   1572      1.1     skrll 
   1573      1.1     skrll static void
   1574  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_adjust_gotplt (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *h)
   1575      1.1     skrll {
   1576      1.1     skrll   if (h->elf.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   1577      1.1     skrll     h = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h->elf.root.u.i.link;
   1578      1.1     skrll 
   1579      1.1     skrll   if (h->gotplt_refcount <= 0)
   1580      1.1     skrll     return;
   1581      1.1     skrll 
   1582      1.1     skrll   /* We simply add the number of gotplt references to the number
   1583      1.1     skrll    * of got references for this symbol.  */
   1584      1.1     skrll   h->elf.got.refcount += h->gotplt_refcount;
   1585      1.1     skrll   h->gotplt_refcount = -1;
   1586      1.1     skrll }
   1587      1.1     skrll 
   1588      1.1     skrll /* Adjust a symbol defined by a dynamic object and referenced by a
   1589      1.1     skrll    regular object.  The current definition is in some section of the
   1590      1.1     skrll    dynamic object, but we're not including those sections.  We have to
   1591      1.1     skrll    change the definition to something the rest of the link can
   1592      1.1     skrll    understand.  */
   1593      1.1     skrll 
   1594      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1595  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1596  1.1.1.2  christos 				struct elf_link_hash_entry *h)
   1597      1.1     skrll {
   1598      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   1599      1.1     skrll   asection *s;
   1600      1.1     skrll 
   1601  1.1.1.3  christos   /* STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT. */
   1602  1.1.1.3  christos   if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   1603  1.1.1.4  christos     {
   1604  1.1.1.4  christos       /* All local STT_GNU_IFUNC references must be treated as local
   1605  1.1.1.4  christos 	 calls via local PLT.  */
   1606  1.1.1.4  christos       if (h->ref_regular && SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h))
   1607  1.1.1.4  christos 	{
   1608  1.1.1.4  christos 	  bfd_size_type pc_count = 0, count = 0;
   1609  1.1.1.4  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp;
   1610  1.1.1.4  christos 	  struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh;
   1611  1.1.1.4  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1612  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1613  1.1.1.4  christos 	  eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h;
   1614  1.1.1.4  christos 	  for (pp = &eh->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; )
   1615  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   1616  1.1.1.4  christos 	      pc_count += p->pc_count;
   1617  1.1.1.4  christos 	      p->count -= p->pc_count;
   1618  1.1.1.4  christos 	      p->pc_count = 0;
   1619  1.1.1.4  christos 	      count += p->count;
   1620  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (p->count == 0)
   1621  1.1.1.4  christos 		*pp = p->next;
   1622  1.1.1.4  christos 	      else
   1623  1.1.1.4  christos 		pp = &p->next;
   1624  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   1625  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1626  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (pc_count || count)
   1627  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   1628  1.1.1.4  christos 	      h->needs_plt = 1;
   1629  1.1.1.4  christos 	      h->non_got_ref = 1;
   1630  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (h->plt.refcount <= 0)
   1631  1.1.1.4  christos 		h->plt.refcount = 1;
   1632  1.1.1.4  christos 	      else
   1633  1.1.1.4  christos 		h->plt.refcount += 1;
   1634  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   1635  1.1.1.4  christos 	}
   1636  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1637  1.1.1.4  christos       if (h->plt.refcount <= 0)
   1638  1.1.1.4  christos 	{
   1639  1.1.1.4  christos 	  h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1640  1.1.1.4  christos 	  h->needs_plt = 0;
   1641  1.1.1.4  christos 	}
   1642  1.1.1.4  christos       return TRUE;
   1643  1.1.1.4  christos     }
   1644  1.1.1.3  christos 
   1645      1.1     skrll   /* If this is a function, put it in the procedure linkage table.  We
   1646      1.1     skrll      will fill in the contents of the procedure linkage table later
   1647      1.1     skrll      (although we could actually do it here).  */
   1648      1.1     skrll   if (h->type == STT_FUNC
   1649      1.1     skrll       || h->needs_plt)
   1650      1.1     skrll     {
   1651      1.1     skrll       if (h->plt.refcount <= 0
   1652  1.1.1.2  christos 	  || SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h)
   1653  1.1.1.2  christos 	  || (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT
   1654  1.1.1.2  christos 	      && h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak))
   1655      1.1     skrll 	{
   1656      1.1     skrll 	  /* This case can occur if we saw a PLT32 reloc in an input
   1657      1.1     skrll 	     file, but the symbol was never referred to by a dynamic
   1658      1.1     skrll 	     object, or if all references were garbage collected.  In
   1659      1.1     skrll 	     such a case, we don't actually need to build a procedure
   1660      1.1     skrll 	     linkage table, and we can just do a PC32 reloc instead.  */
   1661      1.1     skrll 	  h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1662      1.1     skrll 	  h->needs_plt = 0;
   1663      1.1     skrll 	  elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h);
   1664      1.1     skrll 	}
   1665      1.1     skrll 
   1666      1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1667      1.1     skrll     }
   1668      1.1     skrll   else
   1669      1.1     skrll     /* It's possible that we incorrectly decided a .plt reloc was
   1670      1.1     skrll        needed for an R_390_PC32 reloc to a non-function sym in
   1671      1.1     skrll        check_relocs.  We can't decide accurately between function and
   1672      1.1     skrll        non-function syms in check-relocs;  Objects loaded later in
   1673      1.1     skrll        the link may change h->type.  So fix it now.  */
   1674      1.1     skrll     h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1675      1.1     skrll 
   1676      1.1     skrll   /* If this is a weak symbol, and there is a real definition, the
   1677      1.1     skrll      processor independent code will have arranged for us to see the
   1678      1.1     skrll      real definition first, and we can just use the same value.  */
   1679      1.1     skrll   if (h->u.weakdef != NULL)
   1680      1.1     skrll     {
   1681      1.1     skrll       BFD_ASSERT (h->u.weakdef->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   1682      1.1     skrll 		  || h->u.weakdef->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak);
   1683      1.1     skrll       h->root.u.def.section = h->u.weakdef->root.u.def.section;
   1684      1.1     skrll       h->root.u.def.value = h->u.weakdef->root.u.def.value;
   1685      1.1     skrll       if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS || info->nocopyreloc)
   1686      1.1     skrll 	h->non_got_ref = h->u.weakdef->non_got_ref;
   1687      1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1688      1.1     skrll     }
   1689      1.1     skrll 
   1690      1.1     skrll   /* This is a reference to a symbol defined by a dynamic object which
   1691      1.1     skrll      is not a function.  */
   1692      1.1     skrll 
   1693      1.1     skrll   /* If we are creating a shared library, we must presume that the
   1694      1.1     skrll      only references to the symbol are via the global offset table.
   1695      1.1     skrll      For such cases we need not do anything here; the relocations will
   1696      1.1     skrll      be handled correctly by relocate_section.  */
   1697  1.1.1.4  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1698      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1699      1.1     skrll 
   1700      1.1     skrll   /* If there are no references to this symbol that do not use the
   1701      1.1     skrll      GOT, we don't need to generate a copy reloc.  */
   1702      1.1     skrll   if (!h->non_got_ref)
   1703      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1704      1.1     skrll 
   1705      1.1     skrll   /* If -z nocopyreloc was given, we won't generate them either.  */
   1706      1.1     skrll   if (info->nocopyreloc)
   1707      1.1     skrll     {
   1708      1.1     skrll       h->non_got_ref = 0;
   1709      1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1710      1.1     skrll     }
   1711      1.1     skrll 
   1712      1.1     skrll   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS)
   1713      1.1     skrll     {
   1714      1.1     skrll       struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry * eh;
   1715  1.1.1.3  christos       struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1716      1.1     skrll 
   1717      1.1     skrll       eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h;
   1718      1.1     skrll       for (p = eh->dyn_relocs; p != NULL; p = p->next)
   1719      1.1     skrll 	{
   1720      1.1     skrll 	  s = p->sec->output_section;
   1721      1.1     skrll 	  if (s != NULL && (s->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1722      1.1     skrll 	    break;
   1723      1.1     skrll 	}
   1724      1.1     skrll 
   1725      1.1     skrll       /* If we didn't find any dynamic relocs in read-only sections, then
   1726      1.1     skrll 	 we'll be keeping the dynamic relocs and avoiding the copy reloc.  */
   1727      1.1     skrll       if (p == NULL)
   1728      1.1     skrll 	{
   1729      1.1     skrll 	  h->non_got_ref = 0;
   1730      1.1     skrll 	  return TRUE;
   1731      1.1     skrll 	}
   1732      1.1     skrll     }
   1733      1.1     skrll 
   1734      1.1     skrll   /* We must allocate the symbol in our .dynbss section, which will
   1735      1.1     skrll      become part of the .bss section of the executable.  There will be
   1736      1.1     skrll      an entry for this symbol in the .dynsym section.  The dynamic
   1737      1.1     skrll      object will contain position independent code, so all references
   1738      1.1     skrll      from the dynamic object to this symbol will go through the global
   1739      1.1     skrll      offset table.  The dynamic linker will use the .dynsym entry to
   1740      1.1     skrll      determine the address it must put in the global offset table, so
   1741      1.1     skrll      both the dynamic object and the regular object will refer to the
   1742      1.1     skrll      same memory location for the variable.  */
   1743      1.1     skrll 
   1744      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   1745  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1746  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   1747      1.1     skrll 
   1748      1.1     skrll   /* We must generate a R_390_COPY reloc to tell the dynamic linker to
   1749      1.1     skrll      copy the initial value out of the dynamic object and into the
   1750      1.1     skrll      runtime process image.  */
   1751  1.1.1.3  christos   if ((h->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0 && h->size != 0)
   1752      1.1     skrll     {
   1753      1.1     skrll       htab->srelbss->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1754      1.1     skrll       h->needs_copy = 1;
   1755      1.1     skrll     }
   1756      1.1     skrll 
   1757      1.1     skrll   s = htab->sdynbss;
   1758      1.1     skrll 
   1759  1.1.1.4  christos   return _bfd_elf_adjust_dynamic_copy (info, h, s);
   1760      1.1     skrll }
   1761      1.1     skrll 
   1762      1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in .plt, .got and associated reloc sections for
   1763      1.1     skrll    dynamic relocs.  */
   1764      1.1     skrll 
   1765      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1766  1.1.1.2  christos allocate_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
   1767  1.1.1.2  christos 		    void * inf)
   1768      1.1     skrll {
   1769      1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   1770      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   1771  1.1.1.3  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *)h;
   1772  1.1.1.3  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1773      1.1     skrll 
   1774      1.1     skrll   if (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1775      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1776      1.1     skrll 
   1777      1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf;
   1778      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   1779  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1780  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   1781      1.1     skrll 
   1782  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Since STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT, we handle it
   1783  1.1.1.3  christos      here if it is defined and referenced in a non-shared object.  */
   1784  1.1.1.3  christos   if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
   1785  1.1.1.4  christos     return s390_elf_allocate_ifunc_dyn_relocs (info, h);
   1786  1.1.1.3  christos   else if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created
   1787  1.1.1.3  christos 	   && h->plt.refcount > 0)
   1788      1.1     skrll     {
   1789      1.1     skrll       /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   1790      1.1     skrll 	 Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   1791      1.1     skrll       if (h->dynindx == -1
   1792      1.1     skrll 	  && !h->forced_local)
   1793      1.1     skrll 	{
   1794      1.1     skrll 	  if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
   1795      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1796      1.1     skrll 	}
   1797      1.1     skrll 
   1798  1.1.1.4  christos       if (bfd_link_pic (info)
   1799      1.1     skrll 	  || WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1, 0, h))
   1800      1.1     skrll 	{
   1801  1.1.1.3  christos 	  asection *s = htab->elf.splt;
   1802      1.1     skrll 
   1803      1.1     skrll 	  /* If this is the first .plt entry, make room for the special
   1804      1.1     skrll 	     first entry.  */
   1805      1.1     skrll 	  if (s->size == 0)
   1806      1.1     skrll 	    s->size += PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1807      1.1     skrll 
   1808      1.1     skrll 	  h->plt.offset = s->size;
   1809      1.1     skrll 
   1810      1.1     skrll 	  /* If this symbol is not defined in a regular file, and we are
   1811      1.1     skrll 	     not generating a shared library, then set the symbol to this
   1812      1.1     skrll 	     location in the .plt.  This is required to make function
   1813      1.1     skrll 	     pointers compare as equal between the normal executable and
   1814      1.1     skrll 	     the shared library.  */
   1815  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (! bfd_link_pic (info)
   1816      1.1     skrll 	      && !h->def_regular)
   1817      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1818      1.1     skrll 	      h->root.u.def.section = s;
   1819      1.1     skrll 	      h->root.u.def.value = h->plt.offset;
   1820      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1821      1.1     skrll 
   1822      1.1     skrll 	  /* Make room for this entry.  */
   1823      1.1     skrll 	  s->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1824      1.1     skrll 
   1825      1.1     skrll 	  /* We also need to make an entry in the .got.plt section, which
   1826      1.1     skrll 	     will be placed in the .got section by the linker script.  */
   1827  1.1.1.3  christos 	  htab->elf.sgotplt->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1828      1.1     skrll 
   1829      1.1     skrll 	  /* We also need to make an entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   1830  1.1.1.3  christos 	  htab->elf.srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1831      1.1     skrll 	}
   1832      1.1     skrll       else
   1833      1.1     skrll 	{
   1834      1.1     skrll 	  h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1835      1.1     skrll 	  h->needs_plt = 0;
   1836      1.1     skrll 	  elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h);
   1837      1.1     skrll 	}
   1838      1.1     skrll     }
   1839      1.1     skrll   else
   1840      1.1     skrll     {
   1841      1.1     skrll       h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1842      1.1     skrll       h->needs_plt = 0;
   1843      1.1     skrll       elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h);
   1844      1.1     skrll     }
   1845      1.1     skrll 
   1846      1.1     skrll   /* If R_390_TLS_{IE64,GOTIE64,GOTIE12,IEENT} symbol is now local to
   1847      1.1     skrll      the binary, we can optimize a bit. IE64 and GOTIE64 get converted
   1848      1.1     skrll      to R_390_TLS_LE64 requiring no TLS entry. For GOTIE12 and IEENT
   1849      1.1     skrll      we can save the dynamic TLS relocation.  */
   1850      1.1     skrll   if (h->got.refcount > 0
   1851  1.1.1.4  christos       && !bfd_link_pic (info)
   1852      1.1     skrll       && h->dynindx == -1
   1853      1.1     skrll       && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
   1854      1.1     skrll     {
   1855      1.1     skrll       if (elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type == GOT_TLS_IE_NLT)
   1856      1.1     skrll 	/* For the GOTIE access without a literal pool entry the offset has
   1857      1.1     skrll 	   to be stored somewhere. The immediate value in the instruction
   1858      1.1     skrll 	   is not bit enough so the value is stored in the got.  */
   1859      1.1     skrll 	{
   1860  1.1.1.3  christos 	  h->got.offset = htab->elf.sgot->size;
   1861  1.1.1.3  christos 	  htab->elf.sgot->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1862      1.1     skrll 	}
   1863      1.1     skrll       else
   1864      1.1     skrll 	h->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1865      1.1     skrll     }
   1866      1.1     skrll   else if (h->got.refcount > 0)
   1867      1.1     skrll     {
   1868      1.1     skrll       asection *s;
   1869      1.1     skrll       bfd_boolean dyn;
   1870      1.1     skrll       int tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   1871      1.1     skrll 
   1872      1.1     skrll       /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   1873      1.1     skrll 	 Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   1874      1.1     skrll       if (h->dynindx == -1
   1875      1.1     skrll 	  && !h->forced_local)
   1876      1.1     skrll 	{
   1877      1.1     skrll 	  if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
   1878      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1879      1.1     skrll 	}
   1880      1.1     skrll 
   1881  1.1.1.3  christos       s = htab->elf.sgot;
   1882      1.1     skrll       h->got.offset = s->size;
   1883      1.1     skrll       s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1884      1.1     skrll       /* R_390_TLS_GD64 needs 2 consecutive GOT slots.  */
   1885      1.1     skrll       if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
   1886      1.1     skrll 	s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1887      1.1     skrll       dyn = htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created;
   1888      1.1     skrll       /* R_390_TLS_IE64 needs one dynamic relocation,
   1889      1.1     skrll 	 R_390_TLS_GD64 needs one if local symbol and two if global.  */
   1890      1.1     skrll       if ((tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD && h->dynindx == -1)
   1891      1.1     skrll 	  || tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
   1892  1.1.1.3  christos 	htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1893      1.1     skrll       else if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
   1894  1.1.1.3  christos 	htab->elf.srelgot->size += 2 * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1895      1.1     skrll       else if ((ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) == STV_DEFAULT
   1896      1.1     skrll 		|| h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   1897  1.1.1.4  christos 	       && (bfd_link_pic (info)
   1898      1.1     skrll 		   || WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn, 0, h)))
   1899  1.1.1.3  christos 	htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1900      1.1     skrll     }
   1901      1.1     skrll   else
   1902      1.1     skrll     h->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1903      1.1     skrll 
   1904      1.1     skrll   if (eh->dyn_relocs == NULL)
   1905      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1906      1.1     skrll 
   1907      1.1     skrll   /* In the shared -Bsymbolic case, discard space allocated for
   1908      1.1     skrll      dynamic pc-relative relocs against symbols which turn out to be
   1909      1.1     skrll      defined in regular objects.  For the normal shared case, discard
   1910      1.1     skrll      space for pc-relative relocs that have become local due to symbol
   1911      1.1     skrll      visibility changes.  */
   1912      1.1     skrll 
   1913  1.1.1.4  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1914      1.1     skrll     {
   1915  1.1.1.2  christos       if (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h))
   1916      1.1     skrll 	{
   1917  1.1.1.3  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp;
   1918      1.1     skrll 
   1919      1.1     skrll 	  for (pp = &eh->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; )
   1920      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1921      1.1     skrll 	      p->count -= p->pc_count;
   1922      1.1     skrll 	      p->pc_count = 0;
   1923      1.1     skrll 	      if (p->count == 0)
   1924      1.1     skrll 		*pp = p->next;
   1925      1.1     skrll 	      else
   1926      1.1     skrll 		pp = &p->next;
   1927      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1928      1.1     skrll 	}
   1929      1.1     skrll 
   1930      1.1     skrll       /* Also discard relocs on undefined weak syms with non-default
   1931      1.1     skrll 	 visibility.  */
   1932      1.1     skrll       if (eh->dyn_relocs != NULL
   1933      1.1     skrll 	  && h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   1934      1.1     skrll 	{
   1935      1.1     skrll 	  if (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT)
   1936      1.1     skrll 	    eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1937      1.1     skrll 
   1938      1.1     skrll 	  /* Make sure undefined weak symbols are output as a dynamic
   1939      1.1     skrll 	     symbol in PIEs.  */
   1940      1.1     skrll 	  else if (h->dynindx == -1
   1941      1.1     skrll 		   && !h->forced_local)
   1942      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1943      1.1     skrll 	      if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
   1944      1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   1945      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1946      1.1     skrll 	}
   1947      1.1     skrll     }
   1948      1.1     skrll   else if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS)
   1949      1.1     skrll     {
   1950      1.1     skrll       /* For the non-shared case, discard space for relocs against
   1951      1.1     skrll 	 symbols which turn out to need copy relocs or are not
   1952      1.1     skrll 	 dynamic.  */
   1953      1.1     skrll 
   1954      1.1     skrll       if (!h->non_got_ref
   1955      1.1     skrll 	  && ((h->def_dynamic
   1956      1.1     skrll 	       && !h->def_regular)
   1957      1.1     skrll 	      || (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created
   1958      1.1     skrll 		  && (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   1959      1.1     skrll 		      || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined))))
   1960      1.1     skrll 	{
   1961      1.1     skrll 	  /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   1962      1.1     skrll 	     Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   1963      1.1     skrll 	  if (h->dynindx == -1
   1964      1.1     skrll 	      && !h->forced_local)
   1965      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1966      1.1     skrll 	      if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
   1967      1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   1968      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1969      1.1     skrll 
   1970      1.1     skrll 	  /* If that succeeded, we know we'll be keeping all the
   1971      1.1     skrll 	     relocs.  */
   1972      1.1     skrll 	  if (h->dynindx != -1)
   1973      1.1     skrll 	    goto keep;
   1974      1.1     skrll 	}
   1975      1.1     skrll 
   1976      1.1     skrll       eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1977      1.1     skrll 
   1978      1.1     skrll     keep: ;
   1979      1.1     skrll     }
   1980      1.1     skrll 
   1981      1.1     skrll   /* Finally, allocate space.  */
   1982      1.1     skrll   for (p = eh->dyn_relocs; p != NULL; p = p->next)
   1983      1.1     skrll     {
   1984      1.1     skrll       asection *sreloc = elf_section_data (p->sec)->sreloc;
   1985      1.1     skrll       sreloc->size += p->count * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1986      1.1     skrll     }
   1987      1.1     skrll 
   1988      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1989      1.1     skrll }
   1990      1.1     skrll 
   1991      1.1     skrll /* Find any dynamic relocs that apply to read-only sections.  */
   1992      1.1     skrll 
   1993      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1994  1.1.1.3  christos readonly_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *h, void * inf)
   1995      1.1     skrll {
   1996      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh;
   1997  1.1.1.3  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1998      1.1     skrll 
   1999      1.1     skrll   eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h;
   2000      1.1     skrll   for (p = eh->dyn_relocs; p != NULL; p = p->next)
   2001      1.1     skrll     {
   2002      1.1     skrll       asection *s = p->sec->output_section;
   2003      1.1     skrll 
   2004      1.1     skrll       if (s != NULL && (s->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   2005      1.1     skrll 	{
   2006      1.1     skrll 	  struct bfd_link_info *info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf;
   2007      1.1     skrll 
   2008      1.1     skrll 	  info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   2009      1.1     skrll 
   2010      1.1     skrll 	  /* Not an error, just cut short the traversal.  */
   2011      1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
   2012      1.1     skrll 	}
   2013      1.1     skrll     }
   2014      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2015      1.1     skrll }
   2016      1.1     skrll 
   2017      1.1     skrll /* Set the sizes of the dynamic sections.  */
   2018      1.1     skrll 
   2019      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2020  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_size_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   2021  1.1.1.2  christos 				struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2022      1.1     skrll {
   2023      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   2024      1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   2025      1.1     skrll   asection *s;
   2026      1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean relocs;
   2027      1.1     skrll   bfd *ibfd;
   2028      1.1     skrll 
   2029      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   2030  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2031  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   2032  1.1.1.2  christos 
   2033      1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->elf.dynobj;
   2034      1.1     skrll   if (dynobj == NULL)
   2035      1.1     skrll     abort ();
   2036      1.1     skrll 
   2037      1.1     skrll   if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created)
   2038      1.1     skrll     {
   2039      1.1     skrll       /* Set the contents of the .interp section to the interpreter.  */
   2040  1.1.1.4  christos       if (bfd_link_executable (info) && !info->nointerp)
   2041      1.1     skrll 	{
   2042  1.1.1.3  christos 	  s = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".interp");
   2043      1.1     skrll 	  if (s == NULL)
   2044      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2045      1.1     skrll 	  s->size = sizeof ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   2046      1.1     skrll 	  s->contents = (unsigned char *) ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   2047      1.1     skrll 	}
   2048      1.1     skrll     }
   2049      1.1     skrll 
   2050      1.1     skrll   /* Set up .got offsets for local syms, and space for local dynamic
   2051      1.1     skrll      relocs.  */
   2052  1.1.1.4  christos   for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next)
   2053      1.1     skrll     {
   2054      1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_got;
   2055      1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_got;
   2056      1.1     skrll       char *local_tls_type;
   2057      1.1     skrll       bfd_size_type locsymcount;
   2058      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2059      1.1     skrll       asection *srela;
   2060  1.1.1.3  christos       struct plt_entry *local_plt;
   2061  1.1.1.3  christos       unsigned int i;
   2062      1.1     skrll 
   2063      1.1     skrll       if (! is_s390_elf (ibfd))
   2064      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2065      1.1     skrll 
   2066      1.1     skrll       for (s = ibfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
   2067      1.1     skrll 	{
   2068  1.1.1.3  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   2069      1.1     skrll 
   2070      1.1     skrll 	  for (p = elf_section_data (s)->local_dynrel; p != NULL; p = p->next)
   2071      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2072      1.1     skrll 	      if (!bfd_is_abs_section (p->sec)
   2073      1.1     skrll 		  && bfd_is_abs_section (p->sec->output_section))
   2074      1.1     skrll 		{
   2075      1.1     skrll 		  /* Input section has been discarded, either because
   2076      1.1     skrll 		     it is a copy of a linkonce section or due to
   2077      1.1     skrll 		     linker script /DISCARD/, so we'll be discarding
   2078      1.1     skrll 		     the relocs too.  */
   2079      1.1     skrll 		}
   2080      1.1     skrll 	      else if (p->count != 0)
   2081      1.1     skrll 		{
   2082      1.1     skrll 		  srela = elf_section_data (p->sec)->sreloc;
   2083      1.1     skrll 		  srela->size += p->count * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2084      1.1     skrll 		  if ((p->sec->output_section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   2085      1.1     skrll 		    info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   2086      1.1     skrll 		}
   2087      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2088      1.1     skrll 	}
   2089      1.1     skrll 
   2090      1.1     skrll       local_got = elf_local_got_refcounts (ibfd);
   2091      1.1     skrll       if (!local_got)
   2092      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2093      1.1     skrll 
   2094      1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (ibfd);
   2095      1.1     skrll       locsymcount = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   2096      1.1     skrll       end_local_got = local_got + locsymcount;
   2097      1.1     skrll       local_tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (ibfd);
   2098  1.1.1.3  christos       s = htab->elf.sgot;
   2099  1.1.1.3  christos       srela = htab->elf.srelgot;
   2100      1.1     skrll       for (; local_got < end_local_got; ++local_got, ++local_tls_type)
   2101      1.1     skrll 	{
   2102      1.1     skrll 	  if (*local_got > 0)
   2103      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2104      1.1     skrll 	      *local_got = s->size;
   2105      1.1     skrll 	      s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2106      1.1     skrll 	      if (*local_tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
   2107      1.1     skrll 		s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2108  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2109      1.1     skrll 		srela->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2110      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2111      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2112      1.1     skrll 	    *local_got = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2113      1.1     skrll 	}
   2114  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2115  1.1.1.3  christos       local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (ibfd);
   2116  1.1.1.3  christos       for (i = 0; i < symtab_hdr->sh_info; i++)
   2117  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   2118  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (local_plt[i].plt.refcount > 0)
   2119  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   2120  1.1.1.3  christos 	      local_plt[i].plt.offset = htab->elf.iplt->size;
   2121  1.1.1.3  christos 	      htab->elf.iplt->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2122  1.1.1.3  christos 	      htab->elf.igotplt->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2123  1.1.1.3  christos 	      htab->elf.irelplt->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2124  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   2125  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   2126  1.1.1.3  christos 	    local_plt[i].plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2127  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
   2128      1.1     skrll     }
   2129      1.1     skrll 
   2130      1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount > 0)
   2131      1.1     skrll     {
   2132      1.1     skrll       /* Allocate 2 got entries and 1 dynamic reloc for R_390_TLS_LDM64
   2133      1.1     skrll 	 relocs.  */
   2134  1.1.1.3  christos       htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = htab->elf.sgot->size;
   2135  1.1.1.3  christos       htab->elf.sgot->size += 2 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2136  1.1.1.3  christos       htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2137      1.1     skrll     }
   2138      1.1     skrll   else
   2139      1.1     skrll     htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = -1;
   2140      1.1     skrll 
   2141      1.1     skrll   /* Allocate global sym .plt and .got entries, and space for global
   2142      1.1     skrll      sym dynamic relocs.  */
   2143  1.1.1.3  christos   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->elf, allocate_dynrelocs, info);
   2144      1.1     skrll 
   2145      1.1     skrll   /* We now have determined the sizes of the various dynamic sections.
   2146      1.1     skrll      Allocate memory for them.  */
   2147      1.1     skrll   relocs = FALSE;
   2148      1.1     skrll   for (s = dynobj->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
   2149      1.1     skrll     {
   2150      1.1     skrll       if ((s->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
   2151      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2152      1.1     skrll 
   2153  1.1.1.3  christos       if (s == htab->elf.splt
   2154  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.sgot
   2155  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.sgotplt
   2156  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->sdynbss
   2157  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.iplt
   2158  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.igotplt
   2159  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->irelifunc)
   2160      1.1     skrll 	{
   2161      1.1     skrll 	  /* Strip this section if we don't need it; see the
   2162      1.1     skrll 	     comment below.  */
   2163      1.1     skrll 	}
   2164      1.1     skrll       else if (CONST_STRNEQ (bfd_get_section_name (dynobj, s), ".rela"))
   2165      1.1     skrll 	{
   2166  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (s->size != 0 && s != htab->elf.srelplt)
   2167      1.1     skrll 	    relocs = TRUE;
   2168      1.1     skrll 
   2169      1.1     skrll 	  /* We use the reloc_count field as a counter if we need
   2170      1.1     skrll 	     to copy relocs into the output file.  */
   2171      1.1     skrll 	  s->reloc_count = 0;
   2172      1.1     skrll 	}
   2173      1.1     skrll       else
   2174      1.1     skrll 	{
   2175      1.1     skrll 	  /* It's not one of our sections, so don't allocate space.  */
   2176      1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2177      1.1     skrll 	}
   2178      1.1     skrll 
   2179      1.1     skrll       if (s->size == 0)
   2180      1.1     skrll 	{
   2181      1.1     skrll 	  /* If we don't need this section, strip it from the
   2182      1.1     skrll 	     output file.  This is to handle .rela.bss and
   2183      1.1     skrll 	     .rela.plt.  We must create it in
   2184      1.1     skrll 	     create_dynamic_sections, because it must be created
   2185      1.1     skrll 	     before the linker maps input sections to output
   2186      1.1     skrll 	     sections.  The linker does that before
   2187      1.1     skrll 	     adjust_dynamic_symbol is called, and it is that
   2188      1.1     skrll 	     function which decides whether anything needs to go
   2189      1.1     skrll 	     into these sections.  */
   2190      1.1     skrll 
   2191      1.1     skrll 	  s->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
   2192      1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2193      1.1     skrll 	}
   2194      1.1     skrll 
   2195      1.1     skrll       if ((s->flags & SEC_HAS_CONTENTS) == 0)
   2196      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2197      1.1     skrll 
   2198      1.1     skrll       /* Allocate memory for the section contents.  We use bfd_zalloc
   2199      1.1     skrll 	 here in case unused entries are not reclaimed before the
   2200      1.1     skrll 	 section's contents are written out.  This should not happen,
   2201      1.1     skrll 	 but this way if it does, we get a R_390_NONE reloc instead
   2202      1.1     skrll 	 of garbage.  */
   2203      1.1     skrll       s->contents = (bfd_byte *) bfd_zalloc (dynobj, s->size);
   2204      1.1     skrll       if (s->contents == NULL)
   2205      1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   2206      1.1     skrll     }
   2207      1.1     skrll 
   2208      1.1     skrll   if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created)
   2209      1.1     skrll     {
   2210      1.1     skrll       /* Add some entries to the .dynamic section.  We fill in the
   2211      1.1     skrll 	 values later, in elf_s390_finish_dynamic_sections, but we
   2212      1.1     skrll 	 must add the entries now so that we get the correct size for
   2213      1.1     skrll 	 the .dynamic section.  The DT_DEBUG entry is filled in by the
   2214      1.1     skrll 	 dynamic linker and used by the debugger.  */
   2215      1.1     skrll #define add_dynamic_entry(TAG, VAL) \
   2216      1.1     skrll   _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_entry (info, TAG, VAL)
   2217      1.1     skrll 
   2218  1.1.1.4  christos       if (bfd_link_executable (info))
   2219      1.1     skrll 	{
   2220      1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_DEBUG, 0))
   2221      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2222      1.1     skrll 	}
   2223      1.1     skrll 
   2224  1.1.1.3  christos       if (htab->elf.splt->size != 0)
   2225      1.1     skrll 	{
   2226      1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTGOT, 0)
   2227      1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTRELSZ, 0)
   2228      1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTREL, DT_RELA)
   2229      1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_JMPREL, 0))
   2230      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2231      1.1     skrll 	}
   2232      1.1     skrll 
   2233      1.1     skrll       if (relocs)
   2234      1.1     skrll 	{
   2235      1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELA, 0)
   2236      1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELASZ, 0)
   2237      1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELAENT, sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela)))
   2238      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2239      1.1     skrll 
   2240      1.1     skrll 	  /* If any dynamic relocs apply to a read-only section,
   2241      1.1     skrll 	     then we need a DT_TEXTREL entry.  */
   2242      1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->flags & DF_TEXTREL) == 0)
   2243      1.1     skrll 	    elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->elf, readonly_dynrelocs,
   2244  1.1.1.3  christos 				    info);
   2245      1.1     skrll 
   2246      1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->flags & DF_TEXTREL) != 0)
   2247      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2248      1.1     skrll 	      if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_TEXTREL, 0))
   2249      1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   2250      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2251      1.1     skrll 	}
   2252      1.1     skrll     }
   2253      1.1     skrll #undef add_dynamic_entry
   2254      1.1     skrll 
   2255      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2256      1.1     skrll }
   2257      1.1     skrll 
   2258      1.1     skrll /* Return the base VMA address which should be subtracted from real addresses
   2259      1.1     skrll    when resolving @dtpoff relocation.
   2260      1.1     skrll    This is PT_TLS segment p_vaddr.  */
   2261      1.1     skrll 
   2262      1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   2263  1.1.1.3  christos dtpoff_base (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2264      1.1     skrll {
   2265      1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   2266      1.1     skrll   if (elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec == NULL)
   2267      1.1     skrll     return 0;
   2268      1.1     skrll   return elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec->vma;
   2269      1.1     skrll }
   2270      1.1     skrll 
   2271      1.1     skrll /* Return the relocation value for @tpoff relocation
   2272      1.1     skrll    if STT_TLS virtual address is ADDRESS.  */
   2273      1.1     skrll 
   2274      1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   2275  1.1.1.3  christos tpoff (struct bfd_link_info *info, bfd_vma address)
   2276      1.1     skrll {
   2277      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info);
   2278      1.1     skrll 
   2279      1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   2280      1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_sec == NULL)
   2281      1.1     skrll     return 0;
   2282      1.1     skrll   return htab->tls_size + htab->tls_sec->vma - address;
   2283      1.1     skrll }
   2284      1.1     skrll 
   2285      1.1     skrll /* Complain if TLS instruction relocation is against an invalid
   2286      1.1     skrll    instruction.  */
   2287      1.1     skrll 
   2288      1.1     skrll static void
   2289  1.1.1.3  christos invalid_tls_insn (bfd *input_bfd,
   2290  1.1.1.3  christos 		  asection *input_section,
   2291  1.1.1.3  christos 		  Elf_Internal_Rela *rel)
   2292      1.1     skrll {
   2293      1.1     skrll   reloc_howto_type *howto;
   2294      1.1     skrll 
   2295      1.1     skrll   howto = elf_howto_table + ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info);
   2296      1.1     skrll   (*_bfd_error_handler)
   2297      1.1     skrll     (_("%B(%A+0x%lx): invalid instruction for TLS relocation %s"),
   2298      1.1     skrll      input_bfd,
   2299      1.1     skrll      input_section,
   2300      1.1     skrll      (long) rel->r_offset,
   2301      1.1     skrll      howto->name);
   2302      1.1     skrll   bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2303      1.1     skrll }
   2304      1.1     skrll 
   2305      1.1     skrll /* Relocate a 390 ELF section.  */
   2306      1.1     skrll 
   2307      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2308  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_relocate_section (bfd *output_bfd,
   2309  1.1.1.2  christos 			   struct bfd_link_info *info,
   2310  1.1.1.2  christos 			   bfd *input_bfd,
   2311  1.1.1.2  christos 			   asection *input_section,
   2312  1.1.1.2  christos 			   bfd_byte *contents,
   2313  1.1.1.2  christos 			   Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs,
   2314  1.1.1.2  christos 			   Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms,
   2315  1.1.1.2  christos 			   asection **local_sections)
   2316      1.1     skrll {
   2317      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   2318      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2319      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes;
   2320      1.1     skrll   bfd_vma *local_got_offsets;
   2321      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *rel;
   2322      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *relend;
   2323      1.1     skrll 
   2324      1.1     skrll   BFD_ASSERT (is_s390_elf (input_bfd));
   2325      1.1     skrll 
   2326      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   2327  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2328  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   2329  1.1.1.2  christos 
   2330      1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (input_bfd);
   2331      1.1     skrll   sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   2332      1.1     skrll   local_got_offsets = elf_local_got_offsets (input_bfd);
   2333      1.1     skrll 
   2334      1.1     skrll   rel = relocs;
   2335      1.1     skrll   relend = relocs + input_section->reloc_count;
   2336      1.1     skrll   for (; rel < relend; rel++)
   2337      1.1     skrll     {
   2338      1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
   2339      1.1     skrll       reloc_howto_type *howto;
   2340      1.1     skrll       unsigned long r_symndx;
   2341      1.1     skrll       struct elf_link_hash_entry *h;
   2342      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   2343      1.1     skrll       asection *sec;
   2344      1.1     skrll       bfd_vma off;
   2345      1.1     skrll       bfd_vma relocation;
   2346      1.1     skrll       bfd_boolean unresolved_reloc;
   2347      1.1     skrll       bfd_reloc_status_type r;
   2348      1.1     skrll       int tls_type;
   2349  1.1.1.3  christos       asection *base_got = htab->elf.sgot;
   2350      1.1     skrll 
   2351      1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info);
   2352      1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (int) R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT
   2353      1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == (int) R_390_GNU_VTENTRY)
   2354      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2355      1.1     skrll       if (r_type >= (int) R_390_max)
   2356      1.1     skrll 	{
   2357      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2358      1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
   2359      1.1     skrll 	}
   2360      1.1     skrll 
   2361      1.1     skrll       howto = elf_howto_table + r_type;
   2362      1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rel->r_info);
   2363      1.1     skrll 
   2364      1.1     skrll       h = NULL;
   2365      1.1     skrll       sym = NULL;
   2366      1.1     skrll       sec = NULL;
   2367      1.1     skrll       unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2368      1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   2369      1.1     skrll 	{
   2370      1.1     skrll 	  sym = local_syms + r_symndx;
   2371      1.1     skrll 	  sec = local_sections[r_symndx];
   2372  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2373  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   2374  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   2375  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct plt_entry *local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (input_bfd);
   2376  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (local_plt == NULL)
   2377  1.1.1.3  christos 		return FALSE;
   2378  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2379  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* Address of the PLT slot.  */
   2380  1.1.1.3  christos 	      relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2381  1.1.1.3  christos 			    + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2382  1.1.1.3  christos 			    + local_plt[r_symndx].plt.offset);
   2383  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2384  1.1.1.3  christos 	      switch (r_type)
   2385  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2386  1.1.1.4  christos 		case R_390_PLTOFF16:
   2387  1.1.1.4  christos 		case R_390_PLTOFF32:
   2388  1.1.1.4  christos 		case R_390_PLTOFF64:
   2389  1.1.1.4  christos 		  relocation -= htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2390  1.1.1.4  christos 		  break;
   2391  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT12:
   2392  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT16:
   2393  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT20:
   2394  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT32:
   2395  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT64:
   2396  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
   2397  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT12:
   2398  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT16:
   2399  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT20:
   2400  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT32:
   2401  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT64:
   2402  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTENT:
   2403  1.1.1.3  christos 		  {
   2404  1.1.1.3  christos 		    /* Write the PLT slot address into the GOT slot.  */
   2405  1.1.1.3  christos 		    bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation,
   2406  1.1.1.3  christos 				htab->elf.sgot->contents +
   2407  1.1.1.3  christos 				local_got_offsets[r_symndx]);
   2408  1.1.1.3  christos 		    relocation = (local_got_offsets[r_symndx] +
   2409  1.1.1.3  christos 				  htab->elf.sgot->output_offset);
   2410  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2411  1.1.1.3  christos 		    if (r_type == R_390_GOTENT || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
   2412  1.1.1.3  christos 		      relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2413  1.1.1.3  christos 		    break;
   2414  1.1.1.3  christos 		  }
   2415  1.1.1.3  christos 		default:
   2416  1.1.1.3  christos 		  break;
   2417  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2418  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* The output section is needed later in
   2419  1.1.1.3  christos 		 finish_dynamic_section when creating the dynamic
   2420  1.1.1.3  christos 		 relocation.  */
   2421  1.1.1.3  christos 	      local_plt[r_symndx].sec = sec;
   2422  1.1.1.3  christos 	      goto do_relocation;
   2423  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   2424  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   2425  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = _bfd_elf_rela_local_sym (output_bfd, sym, &sec, rel);
   2426      1.1     skrll 	}
   2427      1.1     skrll       else
   2428      1.1     skrll 	{
   2429      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_boolean warned ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
   2430  1.1.1.4  christos 	  bfd_boolean ignored ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
   2431      1.1     skrll 
   2432      1.1     skrll 	  RELOC_FOR_GLOBAL_SYMBOL (info, input_bfd, input_section, rel,
   2433      1.1     skrll 				   r_symndx, symtab_hdr, sym_hashes,
   2434      1.1     skrll 				   h, sec, relocation,
   2435  1.1.1.4  christos 				   unresolved_reloc, warned, ignored);
   2436      1.1     skrll 	}
   2437      1.1     skrll 
   2438  1.1.1.3  christos       if (sec != NULL && discarded_section (sec))
   2439  1.1.1.2  christos 	RELOC_AGAINST_DISCARDED_SECTION (info, input_bfd, input_section,
   2440  1.1.1.3  christos 					 rel, 1, relend, howto, 0, contents);
   2441      1.1     skrll 
   2442  1.1.1.4  christos       if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   2443      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2444      1.1     skrll 
   2445      1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   2446      1.1     skrll 	{
   2447      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT12:
   2448      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT16:
   2449      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT20:
   2450      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT32:
   2451      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT64:
   2452      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
   2453      1.1     skrll 	  /* There are three cases for a GOTPLT relocation. 1) The
   2454      1.1     skrll 	     relocation is against the jump slot entry of a plt that
   2455      1.1     skrll 	     will get emitted to the output file. 2) The relocation
   2456      1.1     skrll 	     is against the jump slot of a plt entry that has been
   2457      1.1     skrll 	     removed. elf_s390_adjust_gotplt has created a GOT entry
   2458      1.1     skrll 	     as replacement. 3) The relocation is against a local symbol.
   2459      1.1     skrll 	     Cases 2) and 3) are the same as the GOT relocation code
   2460      1.1     skrll 	     so we just have to test for case 1 and fall through for
   2461      1.1     skrll 	     the other two.  */
   2462      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL && h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   2463      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2464      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_vma plt_index;
   2465      1.1     skrll 
   2466  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   2467  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2468  1.1.1.3  christos 		  plt_index = h->plt.offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2469  1.1.1.3  christos 		  relocation = (plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE +
   2470  1.1.1.3  christos 				htab->elf.igotplt->output_offset);
   2471  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
   2472  1.1.1.3  christos 		    relocation += htab->elf.igotplt->output_section->vma;
   2473  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2474  1.1.1.3  christos 	      else
   2475  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2476  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* Calc. index no.
   2477  1.1.1.3  christos 		     Current offset - size first entry / entry size.  */
   2478  1.1.1.3  christos 		  plt_index = (h->plt.offset - PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE) /
   2479  1.1.1.3  christos 		    PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2480  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2481  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* Offset in GOT is PLT index plus GOT headers(3)
   2482  1.1.1.5  christos 		     times 8, addr & GOT addr.  */
   2483  1.1.1.3  christos 		  relocation = (plt_index + 3) * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2484  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
   2485  1.1.1.3  christos 		    relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2486  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2487      1.1     skrll 	      unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2488      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   2489      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2490      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
   2491      1.1     skrll 
   2492      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT12:
   2493      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT16:
   2494      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT20:
   2495      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT32:
   2496      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT64:
   2497      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTENT:
   2498      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the global
   2499      1.1     skrll 	     offset table.  */
   2500  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (base_got == NULL)
   2501      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2502      1.1     skrll 
   2503      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   2504      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2505      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_boolean dyn;
   2506      1.1     skrll 
   2507      1.1     skrll 	      off = h->got.offset;
   2508      1.1     skrll 	      dyn = htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created;
   2509  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2510  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   2511  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2512  1.1.1.3  christos 		  BFD_ASSERT (h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1);
   2513  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (off == (bfd_vma)-1)
   2514  1.1.1.3  christos 		    {
   2515  1.1.1.3  christos 		      /* No explicit GOT usage so redirect to the
   2516  1.1.1.3  christos 			 got.iplt slot.  */
   2517  1.1.1.3  christos 		      base_got = htab->elf.igotplt;
   2518  1.1.1.3  christos 		      off = h->plt.offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2519  1.1.1.3  christos 		    }
   2520  1.1.1.3  christos 		  else
   2521  1.1.1.3  christos 		    {
   2522  1.1.1.3  christos 		      /* Explicit GOT slots must contain the address
   2523  1.1.1.3  christos 			 of the PLT slot. This will be handled in
   2524  1.1.1.3  christos 			 finish_dynamic_symbol.  */
   2525  1.1.1.3  christos 		    }
   2526  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2527  1.1.1.4  christos 	      else if (! WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn,
   2528  1.1.1.4  christos 							  bfd_link_pic (info),
   2529  1.1.1.4  christos 							  h)
   2530  1.1.1.4  christos 		       || (bfd_link_pic (info)
   2531  1.1.1.3  christos 			   && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h))
   2532  1.1.1.3  christos 		       || (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other)
   2533  1.1.1.3  christos 			   && h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak))
   2534      1.1     skrll 		{
   2535      1.1     skrll 		  /* This is actually a static link, or it is a
   2536      1.1     skrll 		     -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined
   2537      1.1     skrll 		     locally, or the symbol was forced to be local
   2538      1.1     skrll 		     because of a version file.  We must initialize
   2539      1.1     skrll 		     this entry in the global offset table.  Since the
   2540      1.1     skrll 		     offset must always be a multiple of 2, we use the
   2541      1.1     skrll 		     least significant bit to record whether we have
   2542      1.1     skrll 		     initialized it already.
   2543      1.1     skrll 
   2544      1.1     skrll 		     When doing a dynamic link, we create a .rel.got
   2545      1.1     skrll 		     relocation entry to initialize the value.  This
   2546      1.1     skrll 		     is done in the finish_dynamic_symbol routine.  */
   2547      1.1     skrll 		  if ((off & 1) != 0)
   2548      1.1     skrll 		    off &= ~1;
   2549      1.1     skrll 		  else
   2550      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2551      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation,
   2552  1.1.1.3  christos 				  base_got->contents + off);
   2553      1.1     skrll 		      h->got.offset |= 1;
   2554      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2555  1.1.1.4  christos 
   2556  1.1.1.4  christos 		  if ((h->def_regular
   2557  1.1.1.4  christos 		       && bfd_link_pic (info)
   2558  1.1.1.4  christos 		       && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h))
   2559  1.1.1.4  christos 		      /* lgrl rx,sym@GOTENT -> larl rx, sym */
   2560  1.1.1.4  christos 		      && ((r_type == R_390_GOTENT
   2561  1.1.1.4  christos 			   && (bfd_get_16 (input_bfd,
   2562  1.1.1.4  christos 					   contents + rel->r_offset - 2)
   2563  1.1.1.4  christos 			       & 0xff0f) == 0xc408)
   2564  1.1.1.4  christos 			  /* lg rx, sym@GOT(r12) -> larl rx, sym */
   2565  1.1.1.4  christos 			  || (r_type == R_390_GOT20
   2566  1.1.1.4  christos 			      && (bfd_get_32 (input_bfd,
   2567  1.1.1.4  christos 					      contents + rel->r_offset - 2)
   2568  1.1.1.4  christos 				  & 0xff00f000) == 0xe300c000
   2569  1.1.1.4  christos 			      && bfd_get_8 (input_bfd,
   2570  1.1.1.4  christos 					    contents + rel->r_offset + 3) == 0x04)))
   2571  1.1.1.4  christos 
   2572  1.1.1.4  christos 		    {
   2573  1.1.1.4  christos 		      unsigned short new_insn =
   2574  1.1.1.4  christos 			(0xc000 | (bfd_get_8 (input_bfd,
   2575  1.1.1.4  christos 					      contents + rel->r_offset - 1) & 0xf0));
   2576  1.1.1.4  christos 		      bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, new_insn,
   2577  1.1.1.4  christos 				  contents + rel->r_offset - 2);
   2578  1.1.1.4  christos 		      r_type = R_390_PC32DBL;
   2579  1.1.1.4  christos 		      rel->r_addend = 2;
   2580  1.1.1.4  christos 		      howto = elf_howto_table + r_type;
   2581  1.1.1.4  christos 		      relocation = h->root.u.def.value
   2582  1.1.1.4  christos 			+ h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
   2583  1.1.1.4  christos 			+ h->root.u.def.section->output_offset;
   2584  1.1.1.4  christos 		      goto do_relocation;
   2585  1.1.1.4  christos 		    }
   2586      1.1     skrll 		}
   2587      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2588      1.1     skrll 		unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2589      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2590      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2591      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2592      1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   2593      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2594      1.1     skrll 
   2595      1.1     skrll 	      off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   2596      1.1     skrll 
   2597      1.1     skrll 	      /* The offset must always be a multiple of 8.  We use
   2598      1.1     skrll 		 the least significant bit to record whether we have
   2599      1.1     skrll 		 already generated the necessary reloc.  */
   2600      1.1     skrll 	      if ((off & 1) != 0)
   2601      1.1     skrll 		off &= ~1;
   2602      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2603      1.1     skrll 		{
   2604      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation,
   2605  1.1.1.3  christos 			      htab->elf.sgot->contents + off);
   2606      1.1     skrll 
   2607  1.1.1.4  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2608      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2609      1.1     skrll 		      asection *s;
   2610      1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2611      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_byte *loc;
   2612      1.1     skrll 
   2613  1.1.1.3  christos 		      s = htab->elf.srelgot;
   2614      1.1     skrll 		      if (s == NULL)
   2615      1.1     skrll 			abort ();
   2616      1.1     skrll 
   2617  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
   2618  1.1.1.3  christos 					 + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset
   2619      1.1     skrll 					 + off);
   2620      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
   2621      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   2622      1.1     skrll 		      loc = s->contents;
   2623      1.1     skrll 		      loc += s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2624      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2625      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2626      1.1     skrll 
   2627      1.1     skrll 		  local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   2628      1.1     skrll 		}
   2629      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2630      1.1     skrll 
   2631      1.1     skrll 	  if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   2632      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2633      1.1     skrll 
   2634  1.1.1.3  christos 	  relocation = base_got->output_offset + off;
   2635      1.1     skrll 
   2636      1.1     skrll 	  /* For @GOTENT the relocation is against the offset between
   2637      1.1     skrll 	     the instruction and the symbols entry in the GOT and not
   2638      1.1     skrll 	     between the start of the GOT and the symbols entry. We
   2639      1.1     skrll 	     add the vma of the GOT to get the correct value.  */
   2640      1.1     skrll 	  if (   r_type == R_390_GOTENT
   2641      1.1     skrll 	      || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
   2642  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation += base_got->output_section->vma;
   2643      1.1     skrll 
   2644      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2645      1.1     skrll 
   2646      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF16:
   2647      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF32:
   2648      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF64:
   2649      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocation is relative to the start of the global offset
   2650      1.1     skrll 	     table.  */
   2651      1.1     skrll 
   2652  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h != NULL
   2653  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)
   2654  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && h->def_regular
   2655  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && !bfd_link_executable (info))
   2656  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   2657  1.1.1.4  christos 	      relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2658  1.1.1.4  christos 			    + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2659  1.1.1.4  christos 			    + h->plt.offset
   2660  1.1.1.4  christos 			    - htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma);
   2661  1.1.1.4  christos 	      goto do_relocation;
   2662  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   2663  1.1.1.4  christos 
   2664      1.1     skrll 	  /* Note that sgot->output_offset is not involved in this
   2665      1.1     skrll 	     calculation.  We always want the start of .got.  If we
   2666      1.1     skrll 	     defined _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE in a different way, as is
   2667      1.1     skrll 	     permitted by the ABI, we might have to change this
   2668      1.1     skrll 	     calculation.  */
   2669  1.1.1.3  christos 	  relocation -= htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2670      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2671      1.1     skrll 
   2672      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPC:
   2673      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
   2674      1.1     skrll 	  /* Use global offset table as symbol value.  */
   2675  1.1.1.3  christos 	  relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2676      1.1     skrll 	  unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2677      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2678      1.1     skrll 
   2679  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT12DBL:
   2680      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT16DBL:
   2681  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT24DBL:
   2682      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32:
   2683      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32DBL:
   2684      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT64:
   2685      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
   2686      1.1     skrll 	     procedure linkage table.  */
   2687      1.1     skrll 
   2688      1.1     skrll 	  /* Resolve a PLT32 reloc against a local symbol directly,
   2689      1.1     skrll 	     without using the procedure linkage table.  */
   2690      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL)
   2691      1.1     skrll 	    break;
   2692      1.1     skrll 
   2693      1.1     skrll 	  if (h->plt.offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   2694  1.1.1.4  christos 	      || (htab->elf.splt == NULL && !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)))
   2695      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2696      1.1     skrll 	      /* We didn't make a PLT entry for this symbol.  This
   2697      1.1     skrll 		 happens when statically linking PIC code, or when
   2698      1.1     skrll 		 using -Bsymbolic.  */
   2699      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   2700      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2701  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   2702  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2703  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2704  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + h->plt.offset);
   2705  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   2706  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
   2707  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + htab->elf.splt->output_offset
   2708  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + h->plt.offset);
   2709      1.1     skrll 	  unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2710      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2711      1.1     skrll 
   2712      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF16:
   2713      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF32:
   2714      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF64:
   2715      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
   2716      1.1     skrll 	     procedure linkage table relative to the start of the GOT.  */
   2717      1.1     skrll 
   2718      1.1     skrll 	  /* For local symbols or if we didn't make a PLT entry for
   2719      1.1     skrll 	     this symbol resolve the symbol directly.  */
   2720  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h == NULL
   2721      1.1     skrll 	      || h->plt.offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   2722  1.1.1.4  christos 	      || (htab->elf.splt == NULL && !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)))
   2723      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2724  1.1.1.3  christos 	      relocation -= htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2725      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   2726      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2727      1.1     skrll 
   2728  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   2729  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2730  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2731  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + h->plt.offset
   2732  1.1.1.3  christos 			  - htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma);
   2733  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   2734  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
   2735  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + htab->elf.splt->output_offset
   2736  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + h->plt.offset
   2737  1.1.1.3  christos 			  - htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma);
   2738      1.1     skrll 	  unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2739      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2740      1.1     skrll 
   2741      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16:
   2742  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC12DBL:
   2743      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16DBL:
   2744  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC24DBL:
   2745      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32:
   2746      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32DBL:
   2747      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC64:
   2748  1.1.1.4  christos 	  /* The target of these relocs are instruction operands
   2749  1.1.1.4  christos 	     residing in read-only sections.  We cannot emit a runtime
   2750  1.1.1.4  christos 	     reloc for it.  */
   2751  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h != NULL
   2752  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)
   2753  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && h->def_regular
   2754  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && bfd_link_pic (info))
   2755  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   2756  1.1.1.4  christos 	      relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2757  1.1.1.4  christos 			    + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2758  1.1.1.4  christos 			    + h->plt.offset);
   2759  1.1.1.4  christos 	      goto do_relocation;
   2760  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   2761  1.1.1.4  christos 
   2762  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_8:
   2763  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_16:
   2764  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_32:
   2765  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_64:
   2766  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2767  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (h != NULL
   2768  1.1.1.3  christos 	      && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)
   2769  1.1.1.3  christos 	      && h->def_regular)
   2770  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   2771  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info) || !h->non_got_ref)
   2772  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2773  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* For a non-shared object STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must
   2774  1.1.1.3  christos 		     go through PLT.  */
   2775  1.1.1.3  christos 		  relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2776  1.1.1.3  christos 				+ htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2777  1.1.1.3  christos 				+ h ->plt.offset);
   2778  1.1.1.3  christos 		  goto do_relocation;
   2779  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2780  1.1.1.3  christos 	      else
   2781  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2782  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* For shared objects a runtime relocation is needed.  */
   2783  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2784  1.1.1.3  christos 		  Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2785  1.1.1.3  christos 		  asection *sreloc;
   2786  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2787  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* Need a dynamic relocation to get the real function
   2788  1.1.1.3  christos 		     address.  */
   2789  1.1.1.3  christos 		  outrel.r_offset = _bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd,
   2790  1.1.1.3  christos 							     info,
   2791  1.1.1.3  christos 							     input_section,
   2792  1.1.1.3  christos 							     rel->r_offset);
   2793  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   2794  1.1.1.3  christos 		      || outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2)
   2795  1.1.1.3  christos 		    abort ();
   2796  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2797  1.1.1.3  christos 		  outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_section->vma
   2798  1.1.1.3  christos 				      + input_section->output_offset);
   2799  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2800  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (h->dynindx == -1
   2801  1.1.1.3  christos 		      || h->forced_local
   2802  1.1.1.4  christos 		      || bfd_link_executable (info))
   2803  1.1.1.3  christos 		    {
   2804  1.1.1.3  christos 		      /* This symbol is resolved locally.  */
   2805  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_IRELATIVE);
   2806  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_addend = (h->root.u.def.value
   2807  1.1.1.3  christos 					 + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
   2808  1.1.1.3  christos 					 + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset);
   2809  1.1.1.3  christos 		    }
   2810  1.1.1.3  christos 		  else
   2811  1.1.1.3  christos 		    {
   2812  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, r_type);
   2813  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_addend = 0;
   2814  1.1.1.3  christos 		    }
   2815  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2816  1.1.1.3  christos 		  sreloc = htab->elf.irelifunc;
   2817  1.1.1.3  christos 		  elf_append_rela (output_bfd, sreloc, &outrel);
   2818  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2819  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* If this reloc is against an external symbol, we
   2820  1.1.1.3  christos 		     do not want to fiddle with the addend.  Otherwise,
   2821  1.1.1.3  christos 		     we need to include the symbol value so that it
   2822  1.1.1.3  christos 		     becomes an addend for the dynamic reloc.  For an
   2823  1.1.1.3  christos 		     internal symbol, we have updated addend.  */
   2824  1.1.1.3  christos 		  continue;
   2825  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2826  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   2827  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2828      1.1     skrll 	  if ((input_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0)
   2829      1.1     skrll 	    break;
   2830      1.1     skrll 
   2831  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
   2832      1.1     skrll 	       && (h == NULL
   2833      1.1     skrll 		   || ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) == STV_DEFAULT
   2834      1.1     skrll 		   || h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   2835      1.1     skrll 	       && ((r_type != R_390_PC16
   2836  1.1.1.4  christos 		    && r_type != R_390_PC12DBL
   2837      1.1     skrll 		    && r_type != R_390_PC16DBL
   2838  1.1.1.4  christos 		    && r_type != R_390_PC24DBL
   2839      1.1     skrll 		    && r_type != R_390_PC32
   2840      1.1     skrll 		    && r_type != R_390_PC32DBL
   2841      1.1     skrll 		    && r_type != R_390_PC64)
   2842  1.1.1.2  christos 		   || !SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h)))
   2843      1.1     skrll 	      || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   2844  1.1.1.4  christos 		  && !bfd_link_pic (info)
   2845      1.1     skrll 		  && h != NULL
   2846      1.1     skrll 		  && h->dynindx != -1
   2847      1.1     skrll 		  && !h->non_got_ref
   2848      1.1     skrll 		  && ((h->def_dynamic
   2849      1.1     skrll 		       && !h->def_regular)
   2850      1.1     skrll 		      || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   2851      1.1     skrll 		      || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)))
   2852      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2853      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2854      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_boolean skip, relocate;
   2855      1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   2856      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   2857      1.1     skrll 
   2858      1.1     skrll 	      /* When generating a shared object, these relocations
   2859      1.1     skrll 		 are copied into the output file to be resolved at run
   2860      1.1     skrll 		 time.  */
   2861      1.1     skrll 	      skip = FALSE;
   2862      1.1     skrll 	      relocate = FALSE;
   2863      1.1     skrll 
   2864      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset =
   2865      1.1     skrll 		_bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
   2866      1.1     skrll 					 rel->r_offset);
   2867      1.1     skrll 	      if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1)
   2868      1.1     skrll 		skip = TRUE;
   2869      1.1     skrll 	      else if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2)
   2870      1.1     skrll 		skip = TRUE, relocate = TRUE;
   2871      1.1     skrll 
   2872      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_section->vma
   2873      1.1     skrll 				  + input_section->output_offset);
   2874      1.1     skrll 
   2875      1.1     skrll 	      if (skip)
   2876      1.1     skrll 		memset (&outrel, 0, sizeof outrel);
   2877      1.1     skrll 	      else if (h != NULL
   2878      1.1     skrll 		       && h->dynindx != -1
   2879      1.1     skrll 		       && (r_type == R_390_PC16
   2880  1.1.1.4  christos 			   || r_type == R_390_PC12DBL
   2881      1.1     skrll 			   || r_type == R_390_PC16DBL
   2882  1.1.1.4  christos 			   || r_type == R_390_PC24DBL
   2883      1.1     skrll 			   || r_type == R_390_PC32
   2884      1.1     skrll 			   || r_type == R_390_PC32DBL
   2885      1.1     skrll 			   || r_type == R_390_PC64
   2886  1.1.1.4  christos 			   || !bfd_link_pic (info)
   2887  1.1.1.2  christos 			   || !SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, h)
   2888      1.1     skrll 			   || !h->def_regular))
   2889      1.1     skrll 		{
   2890      1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, r_type);
   2891      1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_addend = rel->r_addend;
   2892      1.1     skrll 		}
   2893      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2894      1.1     skrll 		{
   2895      1.1     skrll 		  /* This symbol is local, or marked to become local.  */
   2896      1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_addend = relocation + rel->r_addend;
   2897      1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type == R_390_64)
   2898      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2899      1.1     skrll 		      relocate = TRUE;
   2900      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
   2901      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2902      1.1     skrll 		  else
   2903      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2904      1.1     skrll 		      long sindx;
   2905      1.1     skrll 
   2906      1.1     skrll 		      if (bfd_is_abs_section (sec))
   2907      1.1     skrll 			sindx = 0;
   2908      1.1     skrll 		      else if (sec == NULL || sec->owner == NULL)
   2909      1.1     skrll 			{
   2910      1.1     skrll 			  bfd_set_error(bfd_error_bad_value);
   2911      1.1     skrll 			  return FALSE;
   2912      1.1     skrll 			}
   2913      1.1     skrll 		      else
   2914      1.1     skrll 			{
   2915      1.1     skrll 			  asection *osec;
   2916      1.1     skrll 
   2917      1.1     skrll 			  osec = sec->output_section;
   2918      1.1     skrll 			  sindx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   2919      1.1     skrll 
   2920      1.1     skrll 			  if (sindx == 0)
   2921      1.1     skrll 			    {
   2922      1.1     skrll 			      osec = htab->elf.text_index_section;
   2923      1.1     skrll 			      sindx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   2924      1.1     skrll 			    }
   2925      1.1     skrll 			  BFD_ASSERT (sindx != 0);
   2926      1.1     skrll 
   2927      1.1     skrll 			  /* We are turning this relocation into one
   2928      1.1     skrll 			     against a section symbol, so subtract out
   2929      1.1     skrll 			     the output section's address but not the
   2930      1.1     skrll 			     offset of the input section in the output
   2931      1.1     skrll 			     section.  */
   2932      1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend -= osec->vma;
   2933      1.1     skrll 			}
   2934      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (sindx, r_type);
   2935      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2936      1.1     skrll 		}
   2937      1.1     skrll 
   2938      1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   2939      1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   2940      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2941      1.1     skrll 
   2942      1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   2943      1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2944      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2945      1.1     skrll 
   2946      1.1     skrll 	      /* If this reloc is against an external symbol, we do
   2947      1.1     skrll 		 not want to fiddle with the addend.  Otherwise, we
   2948      1.1     skrll 		 need to include the symbol value so that it becomes
   2949      1.1     skrll 		 an addend for the dynamic reloc.  */
   2950      1.1     skrll 	      if (! relocate)
   2951      1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2952      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2953      1.1     skrll 
   2954      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2955      1.1     skrll 
   2956      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocations for tls literal pool entries.  */
   2957      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IE64:
   2958  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2959      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2960      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2961      1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   2962      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   2963      1.1     skrll 
   2964      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset = rel->r_offset
   2965      1.1     skrll 				+ input_section->output_section->vma
   2966      1.1     skrll 				+ input_section->output_offset;
   2967      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
   2968      1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   2969      1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   2970      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2971      1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   2972      1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2973      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2974      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2975      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
   2976      1.1     skrll 
   2977      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GD64:
   2978      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
   2979      1.1     skrll 	  r_type = elf_s390_tls_transition (info, r_type, h == NULL);
   2980      1.1     skrll 	  tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   2981      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL && local_got_offsets)
   2982      1.1     skrll 	    tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd) [r_symndx];
   2983      1.1     skrll 	  else if (h != NULL)
   2984      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2985      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   2986  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info) && h->dynindx == -1 && tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
   2987      1.1     skrll 		r_type = R_390_TLS_LE64;
   2988      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2989      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64 && tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
   2990      1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_390_TLS_IE64;
   2991      1.1     skrll 
   2992      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LE64)
   2993      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2994      1.1     skrll 	      /* This relocation gets optimized away by the local exec
   2995      1.1     skrll 		 access optimization.  */
   2996      1.1     skrll 	      BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
   2997      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation),
   2998      1.1     skrll 			  contents + rel->r_offset);
   2999      1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   3000      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3001      1.1     skrll 
   3002  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   3003      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   3004      1.1     skrll 
   3005      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   3006      1.1     skrll 	    off = h->got.offset;
   3007      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3008      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3009      1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   3010      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   3011      1.1     skrll 
   3012      1.1     skrll 	      off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   3013      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3014      1.1     skrll 
   3015      1.1     skrll 	emit_tls_relocs:
   3016      1.1     skrll 
   3017      1.1     skrll 	  if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3018      1.1     skrll 	    off &= ~1;
   3019      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3020      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3021      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3022      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   3023      1.1     skrll 	      int dr_type, indx;
   3024      1.1     skrll 
   3025  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (htab->elf.srelgot == NULL)
   3026      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   3027      1.1     skrll 
   3028  1.1.1.3  christos 	      outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
   3029  1.1.1.3  christos 				 + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off);
   3030      1.1     skrll 
   3031      1.1     skrll 	      indx = h && h->dynindx != -1 ? h->dynindx : 0;
   3032      1.1     skrll 	      if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64)
   3033      1.1     skrll 		dr_type = R_390_TLS_DTPMOD;
   3034      1.1     skrll 	      else
   3035      1.1     skrll 		dr_type = R_390_TLS_TPOFF;
   3036      1.1     skrll 	      if (dr_type == R_390_TLS_TPOFF && indx == 0)
   3037      1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
   3038      1.1     skrll 	      else
   3039      1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = 0;
   3040      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, dr_type);
   3041  1.1.1.3  christos 	      loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents;
   3042  1.1.1.3  christos 	      loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++
   3043      1.1     skrll 		* sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3044      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3045      1.1     skrll 
   3046      1.1     skrll 	      if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64)
   3047      1.1     skrll 		{
   3048      1.1     skrll 		  if (indx == 0)
   3049      1.1     skrll 		    {
   3050      1.1     skrll 	    	      BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
   3051      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
   3052      1.1     skrll 				  relocation - dtpoff_base (info),
   3053  1.1.1.3  christos 				  htab->elf.sgot->contents + off + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   3054      1.1     skrll 		    }
   3055      1.1     skrll 		  else
   3056      1.1     skrll 		    {
   3057      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, R_390_TLS_DTPOFF);
   3058      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_offset += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3059      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend = 0;
   3060  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++;
   3061      1.1     skrll 		      loc += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3062      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3063      1.1     skrll 		    }
   3064      1.1     skrll 		}
   3065      1.1     skrll 
   3066      1.1     skrll 	      if (h != NULL)
   3067      1.1     skrll 		h->got.offset |= 1;
   3068      1.1     skrll 	      else
   3069      1.1     skrll 		local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   3070      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3071      1.1     skrll 
   3072      1.1     skrll 	  if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   3073      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   3074      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info))
   3075      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3076  1.1.1.3  christos 	      relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off;
   3077      1.1     skrll 	      if (r_type == R_390_TLS_IE64 || r_type == R_390_TLS_IEENT)
   3078  1.1.1.3  christos 		relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   3079      1.1     skrll 	      unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   3080      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3081      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3082      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3083  1.1.1.3  christos 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off,
   3084      1.1     skrll 			  contents + rel->r_offset);
   3085      1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   3086      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3087      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3088      1.1     skrll 
   3089      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
   3090      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
   3091      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
   3092      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL)
   3093      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3094      1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   3095      1.1     skrll 		abort();
   3096      1.1     skrll 	      off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   3097  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   3098      1.1     skrll 		goto emit_tls_relocs;
   3099      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3100      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3101      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3102      1.1     skrll 	      off = h->got.offset;
   3103      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   3104  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (bfd_link_pic (info) || h->dynindx != -1 || tls_type < GOT_TLS_IE)
   3105      1.1     skrll 		goto emit_tls_relocs;
   3106      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3107      1.1     skrll 
   3108  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   3109      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   3110      1.1     skrll 
   3111      1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
   3112      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation),
   3113  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.sgot->contents + off);
   3114  1.1.1.3  christos 	  relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off;
   3115      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_IEENT)
   3116  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   3117      1.1     skrll 	  unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   3118      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3119      1.1     skrll 
   3120      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
   3121  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (! bfd_link_pic (info))
   3122      1.1     skrll 	    /* The literal pool entry this relocation refers to gets ignored
   3123      1.1     skrll 	       by the optimized code of the local exec model. Do nothing
   3124      1.1     skrll 	       and the value will turn out zero.  */
   3125      1.1     skrll 	    continue;
   3126      1.1     skrll 
   3127  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   3128      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   3129      1.1     skrll 
   3130      1.1     skrll 	  off = htab->tls_ldm_got.offset;
   3131      1.1     skrll 	  if (off & 1)
   3132      1.1     skrll 	    off &= ~1;
   3133      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3134      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3135      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3136      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   3137      1.1     skrll 
   3138  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (htab->elf.srelgot == NULL)
   3139      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   3140      1.1     skrll 
   3141  1.1.1.3  christos 	      outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
   3142  1.1.1.3  christos 				 + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off);
   3143      1.1     skrll 
   3144      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, 0,
   3145  1.1.1.3  christos 			  htab->elf.sgot->contents + off + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   3146      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_TLS_DTPMOD);
   3147      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_addend = 0;
   3148  1.1.1.3  christos 	      loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents;
   3149  1.1.1.3  christos 	      loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++
   3150      1.1     skrll 		* sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3151      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3152      1.1     skrll 	      htab->tls_ldm_got.offset |= 1;
   3153      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3154  1.1.1.3  christos 	  relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off;
   3155      1.1     skrll 	  unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   3156      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3157      1.1     skrll 
   3158      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LE64:
   3159  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_dll (info))
   3160      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3161      1.1     skrll 	      /* Linking a shared library with non-fpic code requires
   3162      1.1     skrll 		 a R_390_TLS_TPOFF relocation.  */
   3163      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3164      1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   3165      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   3166      1.1     skrll 	      int indx;
   3167      1.1     skrll 
   3168      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset = rel->r_offset
   3169      1.1     skrll 				+ input_section->output_section->vma
   3170      1.1     skrll 				+ input_section->output_offset;
   3171      1.1     skrll 	      if (h != NULL && h->dynindx != -1)
   3172      1.1     skrll 		indx = h->dynindx;
   3173      1.1     skrll 	      else
   3174      1.1     skrll 		indx = 0;
   3175      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, R_390_TLS_TPOFF);
   3176      1.1     skrll 	      if (indx == 0)
   3177      1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
   3178      1.1     skrll 	      else
   3179      1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = 0;
   3180      1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   3181      1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   3182      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   3183      1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   3184      1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3185      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3186      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3187      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3188      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3189      1.1     skrll 	      BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
   3190      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation),
   3191      1.1     skrll 			  contents + rel->r_offset);
   3192      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3193      1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   3194      1.1     skrll 
   3195      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDO64:
   3196  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info) || (input_section->flags & SEC_DEBUGGING))
   3197      1.1     skrll 	    relocation -= dtpoff_base (info);
   3198      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3199      1.1     skrll 	    /* When converting LDO to LE, we must negate.  */
   3200      1.1     skrll 	    relocation = -tpoff (info, relocation);
   3201      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3202      1.1     skrll 
   3203      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocations for tls instructions.  */
   3204      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LOAD:
   3205      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GDCALL:
   3206      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDCALL:
   3207      1.1     skrll 	  tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   3208      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL && local_got_offsets)
   3209      1.1     skrll 	    tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd) [r_symndx];
   3210      1.1     skrll 	  else if (h != NULL)
   3211      1.1     skrll 	    tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   3212      1.1     skrll 
   3213      1.1     skrll 	  if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
   3214      1.1     skrll 	    continue;
   3215      1.1     skrll 
   3216      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LOAD)
   3217      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3218  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info) && (h == NULL || h->dynindx == -1))
   3219      1.1     skrll 		{
   3220      1.1     skrll 		  /* IE->LE transition. Four valid cases:
   3221      1.1     skrll 		     lg %rx,(0,%ry)    -> sllg %rx,%ry,0
   3222      1.1     skrll 		     lg %rx,(%ry,0)    -> sllg %rx,%ry,0
   3223      1.1     skrll 		     lg %rx,(%ry,%r12) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0
   3224      1.1     skrll 		     lg %rx,(%r12,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   3225      1.1     skrll 		  unsigned int insn0, insn1, ry;
   3226      1.1     skrll 
   3227      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3228      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3229      1.1     skrll 		  if (insn1 != 0x0004)
   3230      1.1     skrll 		    invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
   3231      1.1     skrll 		  ry = 0;
   3232      1.1     skrll 		  if ((insn0 & 0xff00f000) == 0xe3000000)
   3233      1.1     skrll 		    /* lg %rx,0(%ry,0) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   3234      1.1     skrll 		    ry = (insn0 & 0x000f0000);
   3235      1.1     skrll 		  else if ((insn0 & 0xff0f0000) == 0xe3000000)
   3236      1.1     skrll 		    /* lg %rx,0(0,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   3237      1.1     skrll 		    ry = (insn0 & 0x0000f000) << 4;
   3238      1.1     skrll 		  else if ((insn0 & 0xff00f000) == 0xe300c000)
   3239      1.1     skrll 		    /* lg %rx,0(%ry,%r12) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   3240      1.1     skrll 		    ry = (insn0 & 0x000f0000);
   3241      1.1     skrll 		  else if ((insn0 & 0xff0f0000) == 0xe30c0000)
   3242      1.1     skrll 		    /* lg %rx,0(%r12,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   3243      1.1     skrll 		    ry = (insn0 & 0x0000f000) << 4;
   3244      1.1     skrll 		  else
   3245      1.1     skrll 		    invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
   3246      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = 0xeb000000 | (insn0 & 0x00f00000) | ry;
   3247      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = 0x000d;
   3248      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3249      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3250      1.1     skrll 		}
   3251      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3252      1.1     skrll 	  else if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GDCALL)
   3253      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3254      1.1     skrll 	      unsigned int insn0, insn1;
   3255      1.1     skrll 
   3256      1.1     skrll 	      insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3257      1.1     skrll 	      insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3258      1.1     skrll 	      if ((insn0 & 0xffff0000) != 0xc0e50000)
   3259      1.1     skrll 		invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
   3260  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info) && (h == NULL || h->dynindx == -1))
   3261      1.1     skrll 		{
   3262      1.1     skrll 		  /* GD->LE transition.
   3263      1.1     skrll 		     brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> brcl 0,. */
   3264      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = 0xc0040000;
   3265      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = 0x0000;
   3266      1.1     skrll 		}
   3267      1.1     skrll 	      else
   3268      1.1     skrll 		{
   3269      1.1     skrll 		  /* GD->IE transition.
   3270      1.1     skrll 		     brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> lg %r2,0(%r2,%r12)  */
   3271      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = 0xe322c000;
   3272      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = 0x0004;
   3273      1.1     skrll 		}
   3274      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3275      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3276      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3277      1.1     skrll 	  else if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LDCALL)
   3278      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3279  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   3280      1.1     skrll 		{
   3281      1.1     skrll 		  unsigned int insn0, insn1;
   3282      1.1     skrll 
   3283      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3284      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3285      1.1     skrll 		  if ((insn0 & 0xffff0000) != 0xc0e50000)
   3286      1.1     skrll 		    invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
   3287      1.1     skrll 		  /* LD->LE transition.
   3288      1.1     skrll 		     brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> brcl 0,. */
   3289      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = 0xc0040000;
   3290      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = 0x0000;
   3291      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3292      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3293      1.1     skrll 		}
   3294      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3295      1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   3296      1.1     skrll 
   3297      1.1     skrll 	default:
   3298      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3299      1.1     skrll 	}
   3300      1.1     skrll 
   3301      1.1     skrll       /* Dynamic relocs are not propagated for SEC_DEBUGGING sections
   3302      1.1     skrll 	 because such sections are not SEC_ALLOC and thus ld.so will
   3303      1.1     skrll 	 not process them.  */
   3304      1.1     skrll       if (unresolved_reloc
   3305      1.1     skrll 	  && !((input_section->flags & SEC_DEBUGGING) != 0
   3306  1.1.1.3  christos 	       && h->def_dynamic)
   3307  1.1.1.3  christos 	  && _bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
   3308  1.1.1.3  christos 				      rel->r_offset) != (bfd_vma) -1)
   3309      1.1     skrll 	(*_bfd_error_handler)
   3310      1.1     skrll 	  (_("%B(%A+0x%lx): unresolvable %s relocation against symbol `%s'"),
   3311      1.1     skrll 	   input_bfd,
   3312      1.1     skrll 	   input_section,
   3313      1.1     skrll 	   (long) rel->r_offset,
   3314      1.1     skrll 	   howto->name,
   3315      1.1     skrll 	   h->root.root.string);
   3316      1.1     skrll 
   3317  1.1.1.3  christos     do_relocation:
   3318  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3319  1.1.1.4  christos       /* When applying a 24 bit reloc we need to start one byte
   3320  1.1.1.4  christos 	 earlier.  Otherwise the 32 bit get/put bfd operations might
   3321  1.1.1.4  christos 	 access a byte after the actual section.  */
   3322  1.1.1.4  christos       if (r_type == R_390_PC24DBL
   3323  1.1.1.4  christos 	  || r_type == R_390_PLT24DBL)
   3324  1.1.1.4  christos 	rel->r_offset--;
   3325  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3326      1.1     skrll       if (r_type == R_390_20
   3327      1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == R_390_GOT20
   3328      1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == R_390_GOTPLT20
   3329      1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == R_390_TLS_GOTIE20)
   3330      1.1     skrll 	{
   3331      1.1     skrll 	  relocation += rel->r_addend;
   3332      1.1     skrll 	  relocation = (relocation&0xfff) << 8 | (relocation&0xff000) >> 12;
   3333      1.1     skrll 	  r = _bfd_final_link_relocate (howto, input_bfd, input_section,
   3334      1.1     skrll 					contents, rel->r_offset,
   3335      1.1     skrll 					relocation, 0);
   3336      1.1     skrll 	}
   3337      1.1     skrll       else
   3338      1.1     skrll 	r = _bfd_final_link_relocate (howto, input_bfd, input_section,
   3339      1.1     skrll 				      contents, rel->r_offset,
   3340      1.1     skrll 				      relocation, rel->r_addend);
   3341      1.1     skrll 
   3342      1.1     skrll       if (r != bfd_reloc_ok)
   3343      1.1     skrll 	{
   3344      1.1     skrll 	  const char *name;
   3345      1.1     skrll 
   3346      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   3347      1.1     skrll 	    name = h->root.root.string;
   3348      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3349      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3350      1.1     skrll 	      name = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd,
   3351      1.1     skrll 						      symtab_hdr->sh_link,
   3352      1.1     skrll 						      sym->st_name);
   3353      1.1     skrll 	      if (name == NULL)
   3354      1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   3355      1.1     skrll 	      if (*name == '\0')
   3356      1.1     skrll 		name = bfd_section_name (input_bfd, sec);
   3357      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3358      1.1     skrll 
   3359      1.1     skrll 	  if (r == bfd_reloc_overflow)
   3360  1.1.1.5  christos 	    (*info->callbacks->reloc_overflow)
   3361  1.1.1.5  christos 	      (info, (h ? &h->root : NULL), name, howto->name,
   3362  1.1.1.5  christos 	       (bfd_vma) 0, input_bfd, input_section, rel->r_offset);
   3363      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3364      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3365      1.1     skrll 	      (*_bfd_error_handler)
   3366      1.1     skrll 		(_("%B(%A+0x%lx): reloc against `%s': error %d"),
   3367      1.1     skrll 		 input_bfd, input_section,
   3368      1.1     skrll 		 (long) rel->r_offset, name, (int) r);
   3369      1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   3370      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3371      1.1     skrll 	}
   3372      1.1     skrll     }
   3373      1.1     skrll 
   3374      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3375      1.1     skrll }
   3376      1.1     skrll 
   3377  1.1.1.3  christos /* Generate the PLT slots together with the dynamic relocations needed
   3378  1.1.1.3  christos    for IFUNC symbols.  */
   3379  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3380  1.1.1.3  christos static void
   3381  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
   3382  1.1.1.3  christos 			      struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3383  1.1.1.3  christos 			      struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
   3384  1.1.1.3  christos 			      struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab,
   3385  1.1.1.3  christos 			      bfd_vma plt_offset,
   3386  1.1.1.3  christos 			      bfd_vma resolver_address)
   3387  1.1.1.3  christos {
   3388  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_vma plt_index;
   3389  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_vma got_offset;
   3390  1.1.1.3  christos   Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   3391  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_byte *loc;
   3392  1.1.1.3  christos   asection *plt, *gotplt, *relplt;
   3393  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3394  1.1.1.3  christos   if (htab->elf.iplt == NULL
   3395  1.1.1.3  christos       || htab->elf.igotplt == NULL
   3396  1.1.1.3  christos       || htab->elf.irelplt == NULL)
   3397  1.1.1.3  christos     abort ();
   3398  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3399  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Index of the PLT slot within iplt section.  */
   3400  1.1.1.3  christos   plt_index = plt_offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3401  1.1.1.3  christos   plt = htab->elf.iplt;
   3402  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Offset into the igot.plt section.  */
   3403  1.1.1.3  christos   got_offset = plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3404  1.1.1.3  christos   gotplt = htab->elf.igotplt;
   3405  1.1.1.3  christos   relplt = htab->elf.irelplt;
   3406  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3407  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fill in the blueprint of a PLT.  */
   3408  1.1.1.3  christos   memcpy (plt->contents + plt_offset, elf_s390x_plt_entry,
   3409  1.1.1.3  christos 	  PLT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   3410  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3411  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fixup the relative address to the GOT entry */
   3412  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3413  1.1.1.3  christos 	      (gotplt->output_section->vma +
   3414  1.1.1.3  christos 	       gotplt->output_offset + got_offset
   3415  1.1.1.3  christos 	       - (plt->output_section->vma +
   3416  1.1.1.3  christos 		  plt->output_offset +
   3417  1.1.1.3  christos 		  plt_offset))/2,
   3418  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt->contents + plt_offset + 2);
   3419  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fixup the relative branch to PLT 0 */
   3420  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, - (plt->output_offset +
   3421  1.1.1.3  christos 			     (PLT_ENTRY_SIZE * plt_index) + 22)/2,
   3422  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt->contents + plt_offset + 24);
   3423  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fixup offset into .rela.plt section.  */
   3424  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relplt->output_offset +
   3425  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela),
   3426  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt->contents + plt_offset + 28);
   3427  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3428  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fill in the entry in the global offset table.
   3429  1.1.1.3  christos      Points to instruction after GOT offset.  */
   3430  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
   3431  1.1.1.3  christos 	      (plt->output_section->vma
   3432  1.1.1.3  christos 	       + plt->output_offset
   3433  1.1.1.3  christos 	       + plt_offset
   3434  1.1.1.3  christos 	       + 14),
   3435  1.1.1.3  christos 	      gotplt->contents + got_offset);
   3436  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3437  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fill in the entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   3438  1.1.1.3  christos   rela.r_offset = (gotplt->output_section->vma
   3439  1.1.1.3  christos 		   + gotplt->output_offset
   3440  1.1.1.3  christos 		   + got_offset);
   3441  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3442  1.1.1.3  christos   if (!h
   3443  1.1.1.3  christos       || h->dynindx == -1
   3444  1.1.1.4  christos       || ((bfd_link_executable (info)
   3445  1.1.1.3  christos 	   || ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT)
   3446  1.1.1.3  christos 	  && h->def_regular))
   3447  1.1.1.3  christos     {
   3448  1.1.1.3  christos       /* The symbol can be locally resolved.  */
   3449  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_IRELATIVE);
   3450  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_addend = resolver_address;
   3451  1.1.1.3  christos     }
   3452  1.1.1.3  christos   else
   3453  1.1.1.3  christos     {
   3454  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_JMP_SLOT);
   3455  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_addend = 0;
   3456  1.1.1.3  christos     }
   3457  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3458  1.1.1.3  christos   loc = relplt->contents + plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3459  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   3460  1.1.1.3  christos }
   3461  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3462  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3463      1.1     skrll /* Finish up dynamic symbol handling.  We set the contents of various
   3464      1.1     skrll    dynamic sections here.  */
   3465      1.1     skrll 
   3466      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   3467  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_finish_dynamic_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
   3468  1.1.1.2  christos 				struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3469  1.1.1.2  christos 				struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
   3470  1.1.1.2  christos 				Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   3471      1.1     skrll {
   3472      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   3473  1.1.1.3  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry*)h;
   3474      1.1     skrll 
   3475      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3476  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3477  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   3478      1.1     skrll 
   3479      1.1     skrll   if (h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   3480      1.1     skrll     {
   3481      1.1     skrll       bfd_vma plt_index;
   3482      1.1     skrll       bfd_vma got_offset;
   3483      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   3484      1.1     skrll       bfd_byte *loc;
   3485      1.1     skrll 
   3486      1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the procedure linkage table.  Set
   3487      1.1     skrll 	 it up.  */
   3488  1.1.1.4  christos       if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
   3489  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   3490  1.1.1.4  christos 	  elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (output_bfd, info, h,
   3491  1.1.1.4  christos 	    htab, h->plt.offset,
   3492  1.1.1.4  christos 	    eh->ifunc_resolver_address +
   3493  1.1.1.4  christos 	    eh->ifunc_resolver_section->output_offset +
   3494  1.1.1.4  christos 	    eh->ifunc_resolver_section->output_section->vma);
   3495  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3496  1.1.1.4  christos 	  /* Do not return yet.  Handling of explicit GOT slots of
   3497  1.1.1.4  christos 	     IFUNC symbols is below.  */
   3498  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
   3499  1.1.1.3  christos       else
   3500  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   3501  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (h->dynindx == -1
   3502  1.1.1.3  christos 	      || htab->elf.splt == NULL
   3503  1.1.1.3  christos 	      || htab->elf.sgotplt == NULL
   3504  1.1.1.3  christos 	      || htab->elf.srelplt == NULL)
   3505  1.1.1.3  christos 	    abort ();
   3506      1.1     skrll 
   3507  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Calc. index no.
   3508  1.1.1.3  christos 	     Current offset - size first entry / entry size.  */
   3509  1.1.1.3  christos 	  plt_index = (h->plt.offset - PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE) / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3510  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3511  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Offset in GOT is PLT index plus GOT headers(3) times 8,
   3512  1.1.1.3  christos 	     addr & GOT addr.  */
   3513  1.1.1.3  christos 	  got_offset = (plt_index + 3) * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3514  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3515  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fill in the blueprint of a PLT.  */
   3516  1.1.1.3  christos 	  memcpy (htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset, elf_s390x_plt_entry,
   3517  1.1.1.3  christos 		  PLT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   3518      1.1     skrll 
   3519  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fixup the relative address to the GOT entry */
   3520  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3521  1.1.1.3  christos 		      (htab->elf.sgotplt->output_section->vma +
   3522  1.1.1.3  christos 		       htab->elf.sgotplt->output_offset + got_offset
   3523  1.1.1.3  christos 		       - (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma +
   3524  1.1.1.3  christos 			  htab->elf.splt->output_offset +
   3525  1.1.1.3  christos 			  h->plt.offset))/2,
   3526  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 2);
   3527  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fixup the relative branch to PLT 0 */
   3528  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, - (PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE +
   3529  1.1.1.3  christos 				     (PLT_ENTRY_SIZE * plt_index) + 22)/2,
   3530  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 24);
   3531  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fixup offset into .rela.plt section.  */
   3532  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela),
   3533  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 28);
   3534      1.1     skrll 
   3535  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fill in the entry in the global offset table.
   3536  1.1.1.3  christos 	     Points to instruction after GOT offset.  */
   3537  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
   3538  1.1.1.3  christos 		      (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
   3539  1.1.1.3  christos 		       + htab->elf.splt->output_offset
   3540  1.1.1.3  christos 		       + h->plt.offset
   3541  1.1.1.3  christos 		       + 14),
   3542  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.sgotplt->contents + got_offset);
   3543  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3544  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fill in the entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   3545  1.1.1.3  christos 	  rela.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgotplt->output_section->vma
   3546  1.1.1.3  christos 			   + htab->elf.sgotplt->output_offset
   3547  1.1.1.3  christos 			   + got_offset);
   3548  1.1.1.3  christos 	  rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_JMP_SLOT);
   3549  1.1.1.3  christos 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   3550  1.1.1.3  christos 	  loc = htab->elf.srelplt->contents + plt_index *
   3551  1.1.1.3  christos 	    sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3552  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   3553  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3554  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (!h->def_regular)
   3555  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   3556  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* Mark the symbol as undefined, rather than as defined in
   3557  1.1.1.3  christos 		 the .plt section.  Leave the value alone.  This is a clue
   3558  1.1.1.3  christos 		 for the dynamic linker, to make function pointer
   3559  1.1.1.3  christos 		 comparisons work between an application and shared
   3560  1.1.1.3  christos 		 library.  */
   3561  1.1.1.3  christos 	      sym->st_shndx = SHN_UNDEF;
   3562  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   3563      1.1     skrll 	}
   3564      1.1     skrll     }
   3565      1.1     skrll 
   3566      1.1     skrll   if (h->got.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   3567      1.1     skrll       && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_GD
   3568      1.1     skrll       && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_IE
   3569      1.1     skrll       && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_IE_NLT)
   3570      1.1     skrll     {
   3571      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   3572      1.1     skrll       bfd_byte *loc;
   3573      1.1     skrll 
   3574      1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the global offset table.  Set it
   3575      1.1     skrll 	 up.  */
   3576  1.1.1.3  christos       if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL || htab->elf.srelgot == NULL)
   3577      1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   3578      1.1     skrll 
   3579  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
   3580  1.1.1.3  christos 		       + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset
   3581      1.1     skrll 		       + (h->got.offset &~ (bfd_vma) 1));
   3582      1.1     skrll 
   3583  1.1.1.3  christos       if (h->def_regular && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   3584  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   3585  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   3586  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   3587  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* An explicit GOT slot usage needs GLOB_DAT.  If the
   3588  1.1.1.3  christos 		 symbol references local the implicit got.iplt slot
   3589  1.1.1.3  christos 		 will be used and the IRELATIVE reloc has been created
   3590  1.1.1.3  christos 		 above.  */
   3591  1.1.1.3  christos 	      goto do_glob_dat;
   3592  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   3593  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   3594  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   3595  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* For non-shared objects explicit GOT slots must be
   3596  1.1.1.3  christos 		 filled with the PLT slot address for pointer
   3597  1.1.1.3  christos 		 equality reasons.  */
   3598  1.1.1.3  christos 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   3599  1.1.1.3  christos 				       + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   3600  1.1.1.3  christos 				       + h->plt.offset),
   3601  1.1.1.3  christos 			  htab->elf.sgot->contents + h->got.offset);
   3602  1.1.1.3  christos 	      return TRUE;
   3603  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   3604  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
   3605  1.1.1.4  christos       else if (bfd_link_pic (info)
   3606  1.1.1.2  christos 	  && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h))
   3607      1.1     skrll 	{
   3608  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* If this is a static link, or it is a -Bsymbolic link and
   3609  1.1.1.3  christos 	     the symbol is defined locally or was forced to be local
   3610  1.1.1.3  christos 	     because of a version file, we just want to emit a
   3611  1.1.1.3  christos 	     RELATIVE reloc.  The entry in the global offset table
   3612  1.1.1.3  christos 	     will already have been initialized in the
   3613  1.1.1.3  christos 	     relocate_section function.  */
   3614  1.1.1.2  christos 	  if (!h->def_regular)
   3615  1.1.1.2  christos 	    return FALSE;
   3616      1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT((h->got.offset & 1) != 0);
   3617      1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
   3618      1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = (h->root.u.def.value
   3619      1.1     skrll 			   + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
   3620      1.1     skrll 			   + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset);
   3621      1.1     skrll 	}
   3622      1.1     skrll       else
   3623      1.1     skrll 	{
   3624      1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT((h->got.offset & 1) == 0);
   3625  1.1.1.3  christos do_glob_dat:
   3626  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0, htab->elf.sgot->contents + h->got.offset);
   3627      1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_GLOB_DAT);
   3628      1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   3629      1.1     skrll 	}
   3630      1.1     skrll 
   3631  1.1.1.3  christos       loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents;
   3632  1.1.1.3  christos       loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3633      1.1     skrll       bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   3634      1.1     skrll     }
   3635      1.1     skrll 
   3636      1.1     skrll   if (h->needs_copy)
   3637      1.1     skrll     {
   3638      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   3639      1.1     skrll       bfd_byte *loc;
   3640      1.1     skrll 
   3641      1.1     skrll       /* This symbols needs a copy reloc.  Set it up.  */
   3642      1.1     skrll 
   3643      1.1     skrll       if (h->dynindx == -1
   3644      1.1     skrll 	  || (h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defined
   3645      1.1     skrll 	      && h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   3646      1.1     skrll 	  || htab->srelbss == NULL)
   3647      1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   3648      1.1     skrll 
   3649      1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (h->root.u.def.value
   3650      1.1     skrll 		       + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
   3651      1.1     skrll 		       + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset);
   3652      1.1     skrll       rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_COPY);
   3653      1.1     skrll       rela.r_addend = 0;
   3654      1.1     skrll       loc = htab->srelbss->contents;
   3655      1.1     skrll       loc += htab->srelbss->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3656      1.1     skrll       bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   3657      1.1     skrll     }
   3658      1.1     skrll 
   3659      1.1     skrll   /* Mark some specially defined symbols as absolute.  */
   3660  1.1.1.4  christos   if (h == htab->elf.hdynamic
   3661      1.1     skrll       || h == htab->elf.hgot
   3662      1.1     skrll       || h == htab->elf.hplt)
   3663      1.1     skrll     sym->st_shndx = SHN_ABS;
   3664      1.1     skrll 
   3665      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3666      1.1     skrll }
   3667      1.1     skrll 
   3668      1.1     skrll /* Used to decide how to sort relocs in an optimal manner for the
   3669      1.1     skrll    dynamic linker, before writing them out.  */
   3670      1.1     skrll 
   3671      1.1     skrll static enum elf_reloc_type_class
   3672  1.1.1.4  christos elf_s390_reloc_type_class (const struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   3673  1.1.1.4  christos 			   const asection *rel_sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   3674  1.1.1.4  christos 			   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
   3675  1.1.1.4  christos {
   3676  1.1.1.4  christos   bfd *abfd = info->output_bfd;
   3677  1.1.1.4  christos   const struct elf_backend_data *bed = get_elf_backend_data (abfd);
   3678  1.1.1.4  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3679  1.1.1.4  christos   unsigned long r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   3680  1.1.1.4  christos   Elf_Internal_Sym sym;
   3681  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3682  1.1.1.4  christos   if (htab->elf.dynsym == NULL
   3683  1.1.1.4  christos       || !bed->s->swap_symbol_in (abfd,
   3684  1.1.1.4  christos 				  (htab->elf.dynsym->contents
   3685  1.1.1.4  christos 				   + r_symndx * bed->s->sizeof_sym),
   3686  1.1.1.4  christos 				  0, &sym))
   3687  1.1.1.4  christos     abort ();
   3688  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3689  1.1.1.4  christos   /* Check relocation against STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol.  */
   3690  1.1.1.4  christos   if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym.st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   3691  1.1.1.4  christos     return reloc_class_ifunc;
   3692  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3693      1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF64_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   3694      1.1     skrll     {
   3695      1.1     skrll     case R_390_RELATIVE:
   3696      1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_relative;
   3697      1.1     skrll     case R_390_JMP_SLOT:
   3698      1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_plt;
   3699      1.1     skrll     case R_390_COPY:
   3700      1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_copy;
   3701      1.1     skrll     default:
   3702      1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_normal;
   3703      1.1     skrll     }
   3704      1.1     skrll }
   3705      1.1     skrll 
   3706      1.1     skrll /* Finish up the dynamic sections.  */
   3707      1.1     skrll 
   3708      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   3709  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_finish_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd,
   3710  1.1.1.2  christos 				  struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3711      1.1     skrll {
   3712      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   3713      1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   3714      1.1     skrll   asection *sdyn;
   3715  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd *ibfd;
   3716  1.1.1.3  christos   unsigned int i;
   3717      1.1     skrll 
   3718      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3719  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3720  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   3721  1.1.1.2  christos 
   3722      1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->elf.dynobj;
   3723  1.1.1.3  christos   sdyn = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".dynamic");
   3724      1.1     skrll 
   3725      1.1     skrll   if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created)
   3726      1.1     skrll     {
   3727      1.1     skrll       Elf64_External_Dyn *dyncon, *dynconend;
   3728      1.1     skrll 
   3729  1.1.1.3  christos       if (sdyn == NULL || htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   3730      1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   3731      1.1     skrll 
   3732      1.1     skrll       dyncon = (Elf64_External_Dyn *) sdyn->contents;
   3733      1.1     skrll       dynconend = (Elf64_External_Dyn *) (sdyn->contents + sdyn->size);
   3734      1.1     skrll       for (; dyncon < dynconend; dyncon++)
   3735      1.1     skrll 	{
   3736      1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Dyn dyn;
   3737      1.1     skrll 	  asection *s;
   3738      1.1     skrll 
   3739      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_in (dynobj, dyncon, &dyn);
   3740      1.1     skrll 
   3741      1.1     skrll 	  switch (dyn.d_tag)
   3742      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3743      1.1     skrll 	    default:
   3744      1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   3745      1.1     skrll 
   3746      1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTGOT:
   3747  1.1.1.5  christos 	      s = htab->elf.sgotplt;
   3748  1.1.1.5  christos 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset;
   3749      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   3750      1.1     skrll 
   3751      1.1     skrll 	    case DT_JMPREL:
   3752  1.1.1.5  christos 	      s = htab->elf.srelplt;
   3753  1.1.1.5  christos 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset;
   3754      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   3755      1.1     skrll 
   3756      1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTRELSZ:
   3757  1.1.1.5  christos 	      dyn.d_un.d_val = htab->elf.srelplt->size + htab->elf.irelplt->size;
   3758      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   3759      1.1     skrll 
   3760      1.1     skrll 	    case DT_RELASZ:
   3761      1.1     skrll 	      /* The procedure linkage table relocs (DT_JMPREL) should
   3762      1.1     skrll 		 not be included in the overall relocs (DT_RELA).
   3763      1.1     skrll 		 Therefore, we override the DT_RELASZ entry here to
   3764      1.1     skrll 		 make it not include the JMPREL relocs.  Since the
   3765      1.1     skrll 		 linker script arranges for .rela.plt to follow all
   3766      1.1     skrll 		 other relocation sections, we don't have to worry
   3767      1.1     skrll 		 about changing the DT_RELA entry.  */
   3768  1.1.1.5  christos 	      dyn.d_un.d_val -= htab->elf.srelplt->size + htab->elf.irelplt->size;
   3769      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   3770      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3771      1.1     skrll 
   3772      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_out (output_bfd, &dyn, dyncon);
   3773      1.1     skrll 	}
   3774      1.1     skrll 
   3775      1.1     skrll       /* Fill in the special first entry in the procedure linkage table.  */
   3776  1.1.1.3  christos       if (htab->elf.splt && htab->elf.splt->size > 0)
   3777      1.1     skrll 	{
   3778      1.1     skrll 	  /* fill in blueprint for plt 0 entry */
   3779  1.1.1.3  christos 	  memcpy (htab->elf.splt->contents, elf_s390x_first_plt_entry,
   3780  1.1.1.3  christos 		  PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE);
   3781      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fixup relative address to start of GOT */
   3782      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3783  1.1.1.5  christos 		      (htab->elf.sgotplt->output_section->vma
   3784  1.1.1.5  christos 		       + htab->elf.sgotplt->output_offset
   3785  1.1.1.5  christos 		       - htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
   3786  1.1.1.5  christos 		       - htab->elf.splt->output_offset - 6)/2,
   3787  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.splt->contents + 8);
   3788      1.1     skrll 	}
   3789  1.1.1.4  christos       if (elf_section_data (htab->elf.splt->output_section) != NULL)
   3790  1.1.1.4  christos 	elf_section_data (htab->elf.splt->output_section)->this_hdr.sh_entsize
   3791  1.1.1.4  christos 	  = PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3792      1.1     skrll     }
   3793      1.1     skrll 
   3794  1.1.1.3  christos   if (htab->elf.sgotplt)
   3795      1.1     skrll     {
   3796      1.1     skrll       /* Fill in the first three entries in the global offset table.  */
   3797  1.1.1.3  christos       if (htab->elf.sgotplt->size > 0)
   3798      1.1     skrll 	{
   3799      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
   3800      1.1     skrll 		      (sdyn == NULL ? (bfd_vma) 0
   3801      1.1     skrll 		       : sdyn->output_section->vma + sdyn->output_offset),
   3802  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.sgotplt->contents);
   3803      1.1     skrll 	  /* One entry for shared object struct ptr.  */
   3804  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0, htab->elf.sgotplt->contents + 8);
   3805      1.1     skrll 	  /* One entry for _dl_runtime_resolve.  */
   3806  1.1.1.5  christos 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0, htab->elf.sgotplt->contents + 16);
   3807      1.1     skrll 	}
   3808      1.1     skrll 
   3809  1.1.1.3  christos       elf_section_data (htab->elf.sgot->output_section)
   3810      1.1     skrll 	->this_hdr.sh_entsize = 8;
   3811      1.1     skrll     }
   3812  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3813  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Finish dynamic symbol for local IFUNC symbols.  */
   3814  1.1.1.4  christos   for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next)
   3815  1.1.1.3  christos     {
   3816  1.1.1.3  christos       struct plt_entry *local_plt;
   3817  1.1.1.3  christos       Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
   3818  1.1.1.3  christos       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   3819  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3820  1.1.1.3  christos       symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (ibfd);
   3821  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3822  1.1.1.3  christos       local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (ibfd);
   3823  1.1.1.3  christos       if (local_plt != NULL)
   3824  1.1.1.3  christos 	for (i = 0; i < symtab_hdr->sh_info; i++)
   3825  1.1.1.3  christos 	  {
   3826  1.1.1.3  christos 	    if (local_plt[i].plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   3827  1.1.1.3  christos 	      {
   3828  1.1.1.3  christos 		asection *sec = local_plt[i].sec;
   3829  1.1.1.3  christos 		isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache, ibfd, i);
   3830  1.1.1.3  christos 		if (isym == NULL)
   3831  1.1.1.3  christos 		  return FALSE;
   3832  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3833  1.1.1.3  christos 		if (ELF_ST_TYPE (isym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   3834  1.1.1.3  christos 		  elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (output_bfd, info, NULL, htab,
   3835  1.1.1.3  christos 						local_plt[i].plt.offset,
   3836  1.1.1.3  christos 						isym->st_value
   3837  1.1.1.3  christos 						+ sec->output_section->vma
   3838  1.1.1.3  christos 						+ sec->output_offset);
   3839  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3840  1.1.1.3  christos 	      }
   3841  1.1.1.3  christos 	  }
   3842  1.1.1.3  christos     }
   3843  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3844      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3845      1.1     skrll }
   3846      1.1     skrll 
   3847      1.1     skrll /* Return address for Ith PLT stub in section PLT, for relocation REL
   3848      1.1     skrll    or (bfd_vma) -1 if it should not be included.  */
   3849      1.1     skrll 
   3850      1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3851      1.1     skrll elf_s390_plt_sym_val (bfd_vma i, const asection *plt,
   3852      1.1     skrll 		      const arelent *rel ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
   3853      1.1     skrll {
   3854      1.1     skrll   return plt->vma + PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE + i * PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3855      1.1     skrll }
   3856      1.1     skrll 
   3857  1.1.1.4  christos /* Merge backend specific data from an object file to the output
   3858  1.1.1.4  christos    object file when linking.  */
   3859  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3860  1.1.1.4  christos static bfd_boolean
   3861  1.1.1.4  christos elf64_s390_merge_private_bfd_data (bfd *ibfd, bfd *obfd)
   3862  1.1.1.4  christos {
   3863  1.1.1.4  christos   if (!is_s390_elf (ibfd) || !is_s390_elf (obfd))
   3864  1.1.1.4  christos     return TRUE;
   3865  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3866  1.1.1.4  christos   if (!elf_s390_merge_obj_attributes (ibfd, obfd))
   3867  1.1.1.4  christos     return FALSE;
   3868  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3869  1.1.1.4  christos   return TRUE;
   3870  1.1.1.4  christos }
   3871  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3872      1.1     skrll /* Why was the hash table entry size definition changed from
   3873      1.1     skrll    ARCH_SIZE/8 to 4? This breaks the 64 bit dynamic linker and
   3874      1.1     skrll    this is the only reason for the s390_elf64_size_info structure.  */
   3875      1.1     skrll 
   3876      1.1     skrll const struct elf_size_info s390_elf64_size_info =
   3877      1.1     skrll {
   3878      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Ehdr),
   3879      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Phdr),
   3880      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Shdr),
   3881      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Rel),
   3882      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela),
   3883      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Sym),
   3884      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Dyn),
   3885      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf_External_Note),
   3886      1.1     skrll   8,		/* hash-table entry size.  */
   3887      1.1     skrll   1,		/* internal relocations per external relocations.  */
   3888      1.1     skrll   64,		/* arch_size.  */
   3889      1.1     skrll   3,		/* log_file_align.  */
   3890      1.1     skrll   ELFCLASS64, EV_CURRENT,
   3891      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_write_out_phdrs,
   3892      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_write_shdrs_and_ehdr,
   3893      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_checksum_contents,
   3894      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_write_relocs,
   3895      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_symbol_in,
   3896      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_symbol_out,
   3897      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_slurp_reloc_table,
   3898      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_slurp_symbol_table,
   3899      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_in,
   3900      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_out,
   3901      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_in,
   3902      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_out,
   3903      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_in,
   3904      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out
   3905      1.1     skrll };
   3906      1.1     skrll 
   3907  1.1.1.4  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM	s390_elf64_vec
   3908      1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME	"elf64-s390"
   3909      1.1     skrll #define ELF_ARCH	bfd_arch_s390
   3910  1.1.1.2  christos #define ELF_TARGET_ID	S390_ELF_DATA
   3911      1.1     skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_CODE EM_S390
   3912      1.1     skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_ALT1 EM_S390_OLD
   3913      1.1     skrll #define ELF_MAXPAGESIZE 0x1000
   3914      1.1     skrll 
   3915      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_size_info		s390_elf64_size_info
   3916      1.1     skrll 
   3917      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_gc_sections	1
   3918      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_refcount	1
   3919      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_got_plt	1
   3920      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_readonly	1
   3921      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_plt_sym	0
   3922      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_got_header_size	24
   3923      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_rela_normal		1
   3924      1.1     skrll 
   3925      1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto		elf_s390_info_to_howto
   3926      1.1     skrll 
   3927      1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_is_local_label_name     elf_s390_is_local_label_name
   3928      1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_link_hash_table_create  elf_s390_link_hash_table_create
   3929      1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_reloc_type_lookup	      elf_s390_reloc_type_lookup
   3930  1.1.1.4  christos #define bfd_elf64_bfd_reloc_name_lookup       elf_s390_reloc_name_lookup
   3931  1.1.1.4  christos #define bfd_elf64_bfd_merge_private_bfd_data  elf64_s390_merge_private_bfd_data
   3932      1.1     skrll 
   3933      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_adjust_dynamic_symbol     elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol
   3934      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_check_relocs	      elf_s390_check_relocs
   3935      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_copy_indirect_symbol      elf_s390_copy_indirect_symbol
   3936      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_create_dynamic_sections   elf_s390_create_dynamic_sections
   3937      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_sections   elf_s390_finish_dynamic_sections
   3938      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_symbol     elf_s390_finish_dynamic_symbol
   3939      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_gc_mark_hook	      elf_s390_gc_mark_hook
   3940      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_gc_sweep_hook	      elf_s390_gc_sweep_hook
   3941      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_reloc_type_class	      elf_s390_reloc_type_class
   3942      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_relocate_section	      elf_s390_relocate_section
   3943      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_size_dynamic_sections     elf_s390_size_dynamic_sections
   3944      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_init_index_section	      _bfd_elf_init_1_index_section
   3945      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_sym_val		      elf_s390_plt_sym_val
   3946  1.1.1.3  christos #define elf_backend_add_symbol_hook           elf_s390_add_symbol_hook
   3947  1.1.1.4  christos #define elf_backend_sort_relocs_p             elf_s390_elf_sort_relocs_p
   3948      1.1     skrll 
   3949      1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf64_mkobject		elf_s390_mkobject
   3950      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_object_p		elf_s390_object_p
   3951      1.1     skrll 
   3952      1.1     skrll #include "elf64-target.h"
   3953